Skip to main content

Full text of "The revised version of the New Testament : with an appendix containing the chief textual changed"

See other formats 


3,X?'.2,^. 


3Fr0m  tly^  Htbrarg  nf 

tly?  BItbrarg  of 
Prtnrrtnn  ©{jwlngtiral  S^tmxmvyi 


LECTURES 

ON     THE 

REVISED     VERSION 


LOXDON    :      PRINTED      BY 

SPOTTISWOODE     AND     CO.,     NEW-STREET     SQUARE 

AND      PARLIAMENT     STREET 


ELY     LECTURES 

REVISED    VERSION    OF    THE 

NEW    TESTAMENT^'^^ 

mill  i^O  ^O  i-i. 


->. 


WITH  A 2V  APPENDIX 


'^.lOSif 


M. 


CONTAINING    THE    CHIEF    TEXTUAL    CHANGES 


I 


BY 


B.  H.  KENNEDY,  D.D. 

CANON    OF   ELY   AND   HON.    FELLOW   OF   ST   JOHN's   COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE 


LONDON 

RICHARD  BENTLEY  &  SON,  NEW  BURLINGTON  STREET 

publishers  in  ©rbiitarn  to  Icr  IHujfstn  \\t  ^ue«n 

1882 


All    rigJits     reserved 


TO    THE 

REV.    F.    H.    SCRIVENER,    LL.D. 

&c.,  &c.,  &c. 

My  dear  Dr.  Scrivener, 

I  obtained  your  kind  permission  to  inscribe 
to  you  the  three  Sermons  printed  in  this  volume. 
They  were  preached  in  Ely  Cathedral  last  July ;  the 
first  of  them  having  been  also  preached  before  the 
University  of  Cambridge  in  January  1861. 

I  wished  to  express  my  high  esteem  for  one  who 
has  devoted  his  life  to  the  holy  task  of  purifying  the 
text  of  the  Greek  Testament.  Others  have  worked 
with  honour  in  the  same  field  at  the  same  time,  two 
of  whom  are  gone  to  their  rest,  Tregelles  and  Alford : 
three  survive,  Tisdiendorf/Westcott  Hort.  All  these, 
except  perhaps  Tregelles,  were  placed  in  conditions 
of  life  more  prosperous  than  yours  seemed  to  be  for 
many  years.  Happily,  your  merits  have  now  found 
a  fair  recompense  of  reward,  by  the  act  of  two  truly 
noble  persons ;  and  I  cordially  wish  you  long  life  and 


vi  DEDICATION. 

health  to  occupy  and  enjoy  your  present  sphere  of 
duty. 

These  sermons  I  preached  during  my  Ely  resi- 
dence, because  I  felt  that  British  congregations  ought 
to  hear  as  much  as  can  be  told  them  concerning  the 
need,  the  conditions,  and  the  execution  of  the  import- 
ant work  which  has  engaged  our  revising  company 
more  than  eleven  years. 

So  far  as  I  have  observed,  Americans  seem  to  have 
understood  and  acknowledged  the  need  of  that  work 
more  justly  than  our  own  countrymen.  In  America 
only  a  few  scattered  voices,  in  Great  Britain  more 
than  a  few,  have  been  found  to  say  in  print  that  no 
work  of  revision  was  required,  seeing  that  the  Author- 
ised Version  is  all  that  can  reasonably  be  desired. 

If  any  sincere  Christian  holds  this  opinion,  I 
would  say  to  him,  with  all  respect,  *  Study  the  ques- 
tion well,  and  you  must  yield  to  the  force  of  facts  ; 
or  else  surrender  your  prejudice  (for  judgment  it  is 
not)  to  the  verdict  of  those  who  have  studied  that 
question.'  My  conviction  was  gained  by  Biblical 
studies  in  early  life,  and  avowed  in  my  sermon  at 
Cambridge  twenty  years  ago  ;  but  it  is  not  to  m}^ 
verdict,  though  faithful,  that  I  ask  the  assent  of  anti- 
revising  Christians.  That  verdict  has  been  confirmed 
by  many  consentient  voices  ;  by  the  five  clergymen 
(eminent  scholars  and  divines)  who  published  a 
revision  of  several  books  of  the  New  Testament,  by 
the  Southern  Convocation  of  the  Anglican  Church, 
when  it  named  a  committee  to   shape  this  work  in 


DEDICATION.  vii 

1870  ;  by  the  Scotch  Kirk  and  the  dissenting  com- 
munities of  Great  Britain,  when  they  gave  representa- 
tives to  sit  in  the  two  revising  companies  ;  by  Chris- 
tians in  the  United  States  of  America,  when  they 
estabhshed  a  committee  of  divines  to  co-operate  with 
the  British  revisers.  Thus  it  appears  that  all  Eng- 
Hsh-speaking  Christian  bodies,  except  the  Roman 
CathoHc,  have  with  united  voice  acknowledged  the 
necessity  and  the  duty  of  revision. 

If  these  things  do  not  assure  anti-revisers  that  the 
work  was  wanted,  let  them  read  and  weigh  the  paper 
of  Dr.  Ezra  Abbot,  the  learned  American  divine, 
which  I  reprint  in  my  second  Appendix.  In  this  able 
summary  they  will  find  proof,  ample  and  irresistible, 
that  revision  was  indeed  sorely  needed ;  that  the 
means  were  provided,  and  the  time  was  ripe  ;  the 
hour  had  struck,  and  the  men  were  ready. 

'  I.  From  your  Cambridge  Text  of  188 1  (supposed 
to  be  that  followed  in  161 1),  and  from  Archdeacon 
Palmer's  Text  of  1 881  (that  corrected  by  the  revisers), 
I  derive  the  following  facts — roughly  stated,  I  admit, 
but  with  exactness  enough  for  my  purpose.  The 
Authorised  Text  contains  about  5,200  readings  which 
the  revisers,  guided  by  the  comparison  of  available 
authorities  (manuscripts,  versions,  and  various  docu- 
mentary evidence),  have  deemed  to  be  erroneous, 
and  have  therefore  altered.  Three-fourths  of  these 
alterations  do  not  in  any  notable  respect  modify  the 
subject-matter  of  the   sacred  writers  ;  but  while  we 


viii  DEDICATION. 

rejoice  in  the  general  agreement  of  texts  as  to  fact 
and  doctrine,  we  ought  all  to  concur  in  wishing  to 
read  as  nearly  as  possible  the  precise  words  of  the 
several  writers.  In  the  exercise  of  my  fallible  judg- 
ment, wishing  to  err  on  the  inclusive  side,  I  have 
printed  in  my  second  Appendix  nearly  1,300  varieties 
of  reading  which  seemed  to  be  in  some  degree 
notable.  But  even  of  this  list  it  is  only  a  fraction 
that  can  be  said  to  have  signal  importance.  I  do  not 
presume  to  settle  that  fraction  ;  for  in  doing  this  the 
best  scholars  and  divines  would  assuredly  differ  among 
themselves.  To  their  collective  deliberation  I  leave 
any  such  judgment. 

It  may,  then,  be  laid  down  as  an  undeniable  truth, 
that  the  Revised  Version  represents  a  Greek  text 
incomparably  more  pure  and  nearer  to  the  original 
than  that  on  which  the  Authorised  Version  is 
founded. 

II.  The  conditions  and  the  execution  of  our  work 
are  correlative  topics,  and  as  such  must  be  treated 
under  one  head.  I  am  now  assisted  by  the  tract  of 
my  dear  friend  Mr.  Humphry,  which  has  come  into 
my  hands  since  I  preached  at  Ely,  entitled  '  One 
Word  on  the  Revised  Version  of  the  New  Testament.' 
I  agree  with  most  of  what  he  has  written,  though,  as 
will  later  appear,  not  with  every  word.  He  justly 
says  that  the  governing  principle  of  our  work  required 
us  '  to  make  as  few  changes  as  possible  consistently 
with    faithfulness :    changes    in    the   nature  of  para- 


DEDICATION.  ix 

phrases  or  embellishment  of  style  were  thus  dis- 
couraged.' He  entirely  confirms  my  language  in  the 
third  sermon  by  saying  (p.  21),  '  Neither  I,  nor  any  of 
my  colleagues,  is  able  to  stand  up  for  the  revision  as 
the  product  of  absolute  wisdom.  Each  of  us,  times 
out  of  number,  has  been  outvoted  by  a  "tyrant 
majority."  There  is  no  sentence  in  our  Preface  which 
had  our  more  hearty  approval  than  that  which  con- 
fesses the  existence  of  blemishes,  imperfections,  fail- 
ures ;  though,  if  each  of  us  had  made  out  a  list  of 
such  blots,  no  two  of  the  lists,  probably,  would  have 
been  found  to  agree.  It  cannot  be  otherwise  where 
many  minds  are  discussing  the  multifarious  details  of 
a  long  and  difficult  work,  though  the  advantages 
arising  from  their  joint  counsel  greatly  outweigh  the 
drawbacks.' 

Referring  to  the  passages  which  he  cites  (pp. 
12,  &c.),  I  agree  with  him  as  to  Luke  xiv.  10; 
xvi.  9;  John  i.  25  ;  x.  16;  Acts  viii.  9,  11,  13  ;  2 
Cor.  v.  14  ;  Phil.  iii.  21  ;  i  Tim.  vi.  5.  I  agree  also 
as  to  Luke  xxiii.  15,  compared  with  Matt.  v.  21  ;  but 
he  might  have  strengthened  his  case  by  observing 
that  the  participle  irsTrpar^ixsvos  favours  the  instru- 
mental dative,  while  the  aorist  sppsOj]  is  more  favour- 
able to  the  objective  dative.  I  agree  with  him  as  to 
the  adoption  of  the  name  Hades  ;  but  I  heartily  wish 
Gehenna  also  had  been  placed  in  the  text,  and  for 
Vssvva  rod  irvpos,  '  the  fiery  Gehenna.'  It  is  notice- 
able that  hell  {/wile,  the  hidden  or  dark  place)  corre- 
sponds  rather   to    Hades  ;  but,   on    account   of   our 


X  DEDICATION. 

existing  associations,  was  properly  refused  to  it.  I 
should  feel  no  regret  if  the  word  Jiell  were  withdrawn 
from  our  Testament.  The  parable  in  St.  Luke  xvi. 
19,  &c.,  may  suffice  for  those  who  wish  to  describe 
'  the  abode  of  sin '  as  a  place  of  fire ;  and  the 
metaphorical  use  of  Gehenna  would  soon  become 
familiar.  Again,  I  agree  very  much  with  Mr.  Hum- 
phry as  to  the  retention  of  archaisms  generally,  and 
the  removal  of  some.  About  '  which  '  or  ^  who,'  when 
personal,  I  had  my  doubts  ;  but  I  acquiesce  in  the 
decision  of  the  majority.  I  agree,  too,  in  the  reten- 
tion of  those  Hebraisms  which  Mr.  Humphry  cites  ; 
but  there  are  some  which  I  should  like  to  have 
altered,  as  the  *  Gehenna  of  fire,'  and  '  the  spirit  of 
holiness  '  (Rom.  i.  4),  by  which  rendering  of  the  A.  V. 
the  antithesis  Kara  aapKa — Kara  Trvavfia  ayccoavvTjs 
is  made  too  obscure.  Our  views  of  the  revised 
Lord's  Prayer  in  Matt.  vi.  are  nearly  similar.  But  I 
do  not  feel  the  force  of  his  remarks  on  the  petition, 
*  Thy  will,'  &c.  I  always  gave  to  '  as '  the  simple 
meaning  '  even  as,'  and  was  rather  disposed  to  keep 
the  Authorised  rendering.  About  utto  tov  irovrjpov  I 
have  been  '  in  a  strait  betwixt  two.'  Once  I  voted 
for  placing  '  evil  one '  in  the  margin  ;  later  on,  feeling 
the  strength  of  the  argument  for  the  masculine,  I  did 
not  vote  :  and  I  am  afraid  I  still  doubt  on  which  side 
the  scale  of  obligation  preponderates.  The  argument 
for  *  robbers,'  as  against  '  thieves,'  in  Matt,  xxvii.  38, 
cannot,  I  think,  be  resisted.  In  Matt.  xxvi.  22  I  de- 
cidedly prefer  *  is  it  I,  Lord  } '  to  the  other  order,  but 


DEDICATION.  xi 

from  no  '  servile  adherence  to  the  Greek.'  In  Mark 
XV.  37,  and  Luke  xxiii.  46,  i^sirvsvas,  it  is,  perhaps, 
vain  to  plead  for  the  literal  'expired'  against  the 
'solemn  old  English  phrase,  gave  up  the  ghost.' 
Luther  renders  it  in  all  four  Gospels  by  one  word, 
'verschied.'  In  John  i.  15  could  not  yayovsp  have 
been  rendered  *  is  come  to  be  '  ?  In  translating  the 
Thea^tetus  of  Plato  I  have  often  used  this  English  for 
ysvsa6ac.  Tov9  crco^ofMsvovs  in  Acts  ii.  is  a  very  trying 
phrase.  What  has  been  chosen  in  the  revision  meets 
the  sense,  though  not  all  one  could  wish :  I  forget 
whether  *  those  seeking  salvation '  was  considered  or 
not.  We  seem  to  concur  as  to  Acts  xxvi.  28,  which 
I  do  not  regard  as  '  difficuh.'  But  my  friend  will  see 
that  in  29  I  agree  with  Webster  and  Wilkinson  in 
taking  h  oXcyo)  koI  sv  /jusyaXo)  with  sv^aifiijv  av  tw 
Bsw,  which  (as  sv  oXiyco  before  modifies  the  act  of 
persuasion,  not  the  quality  of  ^pccmavov)  is  mani- 
festly more  proper  than  to  carry  them  on,  out  of  the 
natural  order,  to  ysvsaOai.  The  correct  rendering  of 
nautical  terms  in  Acts  xxvii.  is  noticed  by  Mr.  Hum- 
phry, and  generally  acknowledged  even  by  adverse 
critics.  The  adoption  of  '  love  '  for  ayaTrr)  everywhere, 
to  the  exclusion  of  the  word  '  charity,'  I  have  defended 
as  certainly  right  and  absolutely  necessary ;  and  I 
suppose  that  all  the  revisers,  like  Mr.  Humphry, 
are  of  this  opinion. 

The    most    important    merits    of    translation    are  | 
accuracy,  neatness,  and  elegance  of  style  and  rhythm.  ' 

In  accuracy  of  translation,  which,  for  a  book  such 


xii  DEDICATION, 

as  the  New  Testament,  is  by  far  the  most  valuable 
quality,  no  scholar  can  doubt  that  the  Revised  Version 
is  incomparably  superior  to  the  Authorised.  A  few 
passages  there  are,  upon  the  interpretation  of  which 
the  revisers  differed  among  themselves,  as  Rom.  ix. 
5  ;  I  Cor.  ii.  13  ;  Phil.  iii.  16  :  a  few  also  on  which 
divines  outside  their  body  differ  from  them,  as  Matt. 
f^/tX^^tf^i.  ig  ;  Heb.  i.  I  :  but  these  are  but  slight  departures 
"t^yxy^hom.  the  general  voice  of  approbation.  A  few  speci- 
mens of  the  two  versions,  A.  and  R.,  compared  with 
each  other,  must  suffice  to  illustrate  this  part  of  my 
letter. 

Matt.  i.  18.  A.,  ivas  espoused ;  R.,  was  betrothed. 
19.  A.,  a  just  man  ;  R.,  a  righteous  man.  22.  A., 
now  all  this  ivas  done  ;  R.,  now  all  this  is  come  to 
pass.  25.  A.,  a  virgin ;  R.,  the  virgin,  ii.  i.  A., 
tJiere  came  wise  men  from  the  east  to  Jerusalem  ;  R., 
wise  men  from  the  east  came  to  Jerusalem.  2.  A., 
ive  have  seen  ;  R.,  we  saw.  6.  A.,  shall  ride ;  R.,  shall 
be  shepherd  of.  8.  A.,  that  I  may  come  and  worship 
him  also  ;  R.,  that  I  also  may  come  and  worship  him. 
16.  A.,  children  ;  R.,  male  children.  A.  coasts  \  R., 
borders.  A.,  diligently  inquired  \  R.,  carefully  learnt. 
22.  A.,  did  reign  ;  R.,  was  reigning,  iii.  i.  A.,  came\ 
R.,  cometh.  4.  A.,  the  same  John  ;  R.,  John  him- 
self. 7.  A.,  came)  R.,  coming.  A.,  who  hath  warned] 
R.,  who  warned.  8.  A.,  meet  for  repentance ;  R., 
worthy  of  repentance.  12.  K.,  purge  his  floor  \  R., 
cleanse  his  threshing-floor.  14.  A.,  John  forbade 
him]  R.,  John  would  have  hindered  him.     16.    A., 


DEDICA  TION.  xiii 

descending  like  a  dove,  and  ligJiting  7ipon  him  ;  R., 
descending  as  a  dove,  and  coming  upon  him. 

As  to  neatness,  I  must  again  be  content  to  quote 
two  or  three  instances  out  of  the  crowd  which  might 
easily  be  gathered  from  the  books  at  large.  Matt.  ii. 
4.  A.,  And  zvhen  he  had  gatJiered  all  the  chief  priests 
and  scribes  of  the  people  together,  he  dema7ided  of  them 
where  Christ  shonld  be  born  ;  R.,  And  gathering 
together  all  the  chief  priests  and  scribes  of  the  people, 
he  inquired  of  them  where  the  Christ  should  be  born. 
(Compare  also  v.  7,  9,  11.)  iv.  3.  A.,  And  when  the 
tempter  came  to  him,  he  said,  If  thou  be  the  Son  of 
God,  command  that  these  stones  be  made  bread;  R., 
And  the  tempter  came  and  said  unto  him,  If  thou  art 
the  Son  of  God,  command  that  these  stones  become 
bread.  24.  A.,  And  his  fame  went  throughout  all 
Syria  :  and  they  brougJit  tcnto  him  all  sick  people  that 
were  taken  with  divers  diseases  and  torments,  and  those 
zvhich  were  possessed  witJi  devils,  and  those  which  were 
lunatic,  and  those  that  had  the  palsy ;  and  he  healed 
them  ;  R.,  And  the  report  of  him  went  forth  into  all 
Syria  ;  and  they  brought  unto  him  all  that  were  sick, 
holden  with  divers  diseases  and  torments,  possessed 
with  devils,  and  epileptic,  and  palsied  ;  and  he  healed 
them.  [As  larger  specimens,  Rom.  v.,  or  Phil,  ii., 
may  be  compared  in  the  two  versions.] 

Style  and  rhythm  are  in  some  degree  matters  of 
opinion,  and  different  minds  must  often  agree  to 
differ  respecting  them.  In  Matt.  v.  26  we  have  been 
much  censured  for  writing  '  the  last  farthing '  for  '  the 


xiv  DEDICATION. 

uttermost  farthing '  of  Auth.  V.  But  without  raising 
the  disputable  question  whether  uttermost  is,  without 
Hmitation,  a  synonym  of  '  last/  I  think  it  in  better 
taste  here  to  use  '  last'  If  I  had  no  silver  in  my 
purse,  I  might  say,  I  have  used  it  to  the  last  sixpence  ; 
I  would  not  say, '  to  the  uttermost  sixpence.'  A  severe 
critic  of  our  grammar  and  style,  writing  in  '  Public 
Opinion,'  calls  us  to  account  for  employing  an  ellipse 
common  to  Greek,  Latin,  and  German,  as  well  as  to 
\  our  own  tongue — the  use  of  one  singular  verb  with 
I  several  subjects.  Therefore,  as  to  I  Cor.  xiii.  13, '  vvv\  h\ 
'  /jisvso  7rLCTTL9,  sXiTi^,  aydiTT),  TO.  Tpla  ravra  —  nunc  autem 
manet  spes,  fides,  caritas,  tria  hsec — nun  aber  bleibt 
Glaube,  Hoffnung,  Liebe,  diese  drei — but  now  abideth 
faith,  hope,  love,  these  three ' — each  version  is  alike 
erroneous,  alike  condemnable,  in  his  judgment.  But 
perhaps  the  idiom  of  four  concurring  languages,  repre- 
sented severally  by  Paul,  Jerome,  Luther,  and  the  Re- 
visers of  161 1  and  1 88 1,  maybe  a  quadrilateral  strong 
enough  to  sustain,  without  succumbing,  the  assault  of 
one  modern  English  grammarian.  In  Matt.  xxii. 
40,  our  defence  would  have  been  more  complete  if, 
after  taking  Kpsfiarai  for  the  old  reading  Kpsfiavrat, 
we  had  translated  in  the  order  of  our  Greek,  'the 
whole  law  hangeth,'  instead  of  'hangeth  the  whole 
law.'  The  same  critic  contrasts,  to  our  apparent 
disadvantage,  the  two  translations,  Authorised  and 
Revised,  of  Matt  xiii.  37-39.  Let  me  set  them  side 
by  side,  as  he  has  done. 


DEDICATION. 


Aiith. 

He  answered  and  said 
unto  them,  He  that  soweth 
the  good  seed  is  the  Son 
of  man  ;  the  field  is  the 
world  ;  the  good  seed  are 
the  children  of  the  king- 
dom ;  but  the  tares  are 
the  children  of  the  wicked 
one ;  the  enemy  that 
sowed  them  is  the  devil ; 
the  harvest  is  the  end  of 
the  world  ;  and  the  reap- 
ers are  the  angels. 


Rev. 

And  he  answered  and 
said,  He  that  soweth  the 
good  seed  is  the  Son  of 
man  ;  and  the  field  is  the 
world  ;  and  the  good 
seed,  these  are  the  sons 
of  the  kingdom  ;  and  the 
tares  are  the  sons  of  the 
evil  one  ;  and  the  enemy 
that  sowed  them  is  the 
devil ;  and  the  harvest  is 
the  end  of  the  world  ;  and 
the  reapers  are  angels. 


Here  it  cannot  be  denied  that  the  Authorised,  by 
neglecting  the  particles,  has  gained  a  buoyancy  and 
comeliness  of  form  which  the  Revisers  have  sacrificed 
by  retaining  seven  *  ands  '  instead  of  one.  But  what 
the  critic  does  not  notice  or  suggest  is  this,  that  their 
choice  was  made  with  full  deliberation,  and  clear  con- 
sciousness of  its  rhetorical  disadvantage.  The  older 
translators  had,  in  this  somewhat  exceptional  case, 
thought  proper  to  exhibit  a  piece  of  English  well 
pared  and  neatly  trimmed.  The  Revisers  thought 
it  better  to  retain  the  peculiar  character  of  St. 
Matthew's  style.  A  characteristic  habit  of  St.  Mark 
is  the  frequent  '  straightway ; '  of  St.  Luke  the 
oft-recurring  phrase  '  and  it  came  to  pass ; '  in   St 


xvi  DEDICATION. 

Matthew  the  superabundant  number  of  connective 
particles,  h\  and  KaL  The  Revisers,  as  faithful 
portrait-painters,  were  minded  to  retain  all  these 
peculiar  features.  Pedantry  there  was  none  in  this 
decision  ;  nor  ought  such  a  word  ever  to  have  been 
applied  to  a  body  of  men  so  variously  trained  in 
different  schools  and  colleges,  all  of  mature  age,  and 
most  of  them  long  employed  in  the  highest  work  of 
English  culture.  I  cannot,  however,  deny  that  in  the 
passage  last  cited  there  is  something  to  be  said  in 
favour  of  the  Authorised  Version.  It  is  this  : — In  the 
Revised  English  ^  and '  is  a  heavier  particle  than  Se 
which  it  represents  ;  and,  as  it  begins  each  clause, 
while  hz  is  always  post-positive,  the  heaviness  of  the 
Revised  Version  is  further  increased  by  this  circum- 
stance. For  these  reasons  it  is  very  possible  that,  if  a 
larger  company  of  Revisers  were,  as  a  court  of 
appeal,  to  review  our  work  on  a  definite  number  of 
disputed  points  (this  being  one),  a  majority  might 
rev^erse  our  decision,  and  vote  in  this  particular  case 
to  omit  the  particles.  I  have  spoken  of  their  omission 
here  by  the  older  translators  as  an  exceptional 
instance.  Comparison  of  ch.  viii.  in  A.  V.  will  con- 
firm this  opinion.  Out  of  thirty-four  of  its  verses, 
twenty-three  begin  with  *  and,'  which  occurs  forty-three 
times  besides  ;  R.  V.,  maintaining  its  own  principle, 
begins  twenty-nine  of  the  verses  with  '  and,'  and  has 
'  and  '  forty  times  additionally. 

Having  been  thus  led  to  speak  of  a  review  of  our 
work  as  an  imaginary  circumstance,  and  being  so  far 


DEDICATION.  x\ 

advanced  in  years  that  I  cannot  expect  to  see  the  ^ 
issue  of  this  momentous  enterprise,  I  venture  to  ask 
those  who  are  the  proper  persons  to  consider  and  de- 
cide, whether,  after  the  interval  of  a  year,  within  which 
time  criticism  at  home  and  abroad  may  have  said  its 
last  word,  the  Revising  Company  might  not  usefully 
be  invited  to  meet  again,  and,  while  they  review  their 
reviewers,  to  review  themselves  by  such  light  as  would 
have  been  gained.  To  what  steps  such  a  review 
might  lead,  I  do  not  presume,  as  a  single  member,  to 
suggest.  *  Viderint  alii.'  Surely  a  heavy  respon- 
sibility would  rest  somewhere,  I  cannot  say  where,  if 
the  present  great  opportunity  should  be  frittered 
away,  instead  of  being  improved  to  the  utmost  ;  if 
Bibles  and  liturgies  containing  proved  corruptions 
and  errors  in  important  passages  were  long  left  to 
circulate  among  Christian  people,  as  representing  the 
pure  Word  of  God.  To  many  minds  this  would  seem 
to  be  a  shame  and  a  scandal. 

III.  You  and  I,  dear  Dr.  Scrivener,  have  sat 
together  eleven  years,  often  voting,  like  other  Re- 
visers, on  opposite  sides,  but  without  impairing,  as  I 
hope  and  believe,  our  mutual  regard  and  esteem. 
My  view  of  Rom.  ix.  5  (to  which  I  must  now  add  Tit. 
ii.  13)  has  not,  as  I  know,  your  approval  and  support. 
My  reasons  for  it  are  set  forth  in  Appendix  I.  to  these 
sermons,  and  need  not  be  recited  here.  But,  as  my 
friend  Mr.  Humphry  speaks  with  avowed  pleasure  of 
the  new  rendering  adopted  in  Titus,  I  am  compelled 

a 


fe 


xviii  DEDICATION. 

unwillingly  to  say  that  I  do  not  share  his  satisfaction  ; 
for  I  feel  morally  certain  that  St.  Paul's  mind  would 
have  been  expressed  had  '  our  Saviour '  been  written 
(as  in  A.  V.)  instead  of  Saviour  alone,  or  if,  to  avoid  all 
doubt,  it  had  been  placed  at  the  close  of  the  sentence, 
'  the  great  God  and  Jesus  Christ  our  Saviour.'  In  an- 
other place  (p.  15)  Mr.  Humphry  justly  deprecates  'a 
servile  adherence  to  the  order  of  the  Greek  ; '  I  do 
the  same  here.  I  would  give  to  ^corrjpo^  a  capital  S  : 
and  as  to  the  absence  of  the  article  rov,  after  having 
rendered  'Ajlov  Tlvsyfjuaros  in  Matt.  i.  20,  and  "Ayiov 
UvsvfjLa  in  Luke  ii.,  '  t/ie  Holy  Ghost,'  besides  other 
places  in  which  we  have  supplied  a  definite  article, 
there  was  no  occasion  to  avoid  a  like  freedom  here. 
Therefore,  if  on  doctrinal  grounds  I  thought  it  im- 
portant to  argue  that  St.  Paul  does  not  give  to  our 
Saviour  the  predicate  Sso^,  I  should  refuse  to  ac- 
knowledge either  passage,  Rom.  or  Tit.,  as  valid 
proof  against  me.  But  I  have  no  such  interest.  I 
accept  with  reverent  assent  the  decrees  of  Nicsea 
and  Constantinople,  and  the  definitions  of  the  later 
creed,  '  Ouicunque  vult,'  as  logically  just  deductions 
from  the  teaching  of  Holy  Scripture,  thus  adhering 
to  the  sixth  Article  of  my  Church  as  well  as  to  the 
first  and  eighth.  Therefore  my  orthodoxy  cannot  be 
impugned  by  authority.  It  may  be  impugned  un- 
authoritatively  by  those  who  have  persuaded  them- 
selves that  the  writers  of  Holy  Scripture  v^ere  not 
only  guarded  by  the  Holy  Spirit  from  all  noxious 
error,  but  also   guided   into   all  truth   in   heaven  and 


DEDICATION.  xix 

earth.  I  do  not  share  this  opinion.  St.  Paul  calls 
Qe6t7)s-^  mystery  (i  Tim.  iii.  i6)  ;  he  calls  Christ  Him- 
self the  mystery  of  God  (Col.  i.  27  ;  ii.  2)  ;  he  speaks  of 
Christ  Jesus  (Phil,  ii )  as  hv  /mopcfif}  Ssov  v7rdp')((ov,  and 
(equivalently)  as  o)v  taa  Sso) :  he  says  (Col.  ii.  9)  that 
in  Christ  dwells  all  the  fulness  of  OeoTrjs  in  bodily 
form  :  but  when  to  the  Christian  Jews  of  Rome  (Rom. 
i.  3,  4)  he  describes  Him  solemnly  as  the  subject  of 
his  gospel,  how  does  he  speak  of  Him }  As  Son, 
'  born  of  the  seed  of  David  according  to  the  flesh, 
but  according  to  His  divine  spirit  {Kara  TrvsvfMa 
dyLcoavvrjs)  defined  to  be  the  Son  of  God.'  As  Paul  in 
these  great  places,  and  in  so  many  others,  has  re- 
frained from  predicating  Christ  as  dsos,  I  do  not 
think  he  did  so  in  two  dubious  places,  confessedly 
capable  of  being  otherwise  explained.  Even  St. 
John,  who  has  in  his  opening  chapter  Oso9  r/v  6 
A6yo9,  and  perhaps  even  /jLovojsvrj^  6s6s,  in  allusion 
to  Christ,  does  not  repeat  the  same  elsewhere. 
Hence  I  do  not  think  that  any  apostle,  John,  or 
Peter,  or  Paul,  was  so  taught  the  full  fjuvanqpiov 
Oeorriros  as  that  they  were  prepared  to  formulate  the 
decrees  of  Nicsea  and  Constantinople,  which  appeared 
after  300  years  and  more,  or  the  Trinitarian  exegesis, 
which  was  completed  after  600  years  and  more.  But 
they,  with  the  other  evangelists,  guided  by  the  Holy 
Spirit,  furnished  the  materials  from  which  those 
doctrines  were  developed.  What  then }  Are  we 
better  off  than  they  by  virtue  of  our  Trinitarian  logic. ^ 
In  point  of  practice,  not  a  whit.     They  knew  all  that 


XX  BEDICATION. 

was  needed  to  make  them  love  Christ  as  human  and 
divine,  to  worship  him  as  divine.  Can  we  practically 
do  more  ?  They  knew  that  they  had  received  the 
Divine  Spirit,  and  they  could  pray  for  the  continuance 
of  His  gifts,  individually  and  in  communion.  Can 
we  practically  do  more  ?  Happy  we  if  we  practically 
do  as  much.  And,  after  all,  what  are  our  dogmas 
iTzpi  dsoTrfTos,  concerning  the  divine  '  modus  exis- 
tendi ' }  If  we  examine  them  with  care,  we  shall  find 
them,  mainly,  logical  negations,  however  important 
and  valuable  for  repelling  error.  We  see  God  hi 
icroTTTpov  h  alvl^fiarL.  If  we  believe  in  Him,  hope  in 
Him,  love  Him,  as  shown  to  us  in  Christ  Jesus  crcofia- 
TiKa)9,  the  TOTS  will  come  in  His  good  time,  when  we 
shall  see  Him  irpocrwirov  irpos  irpoacdirov.  Meanwhile 
the  Nicene  Creed,  the  creed  '  Ouicunque  vult,'  the 
Anglican  and  other  Articles,  are,  on  this  subject, 
i/c  fxspovs.  Till  then  '  we  know  in  part,  and  we  pro- 
phesy in  part  :  but  when  that  which  is  perfect  is  come, 
that  which  is  in  part  shall  be  done  away.'  'Although' 
(says  Hooker)  *  to  know  God  be  life,  and  joy  to  make 
mention  of  His  name,  yet  our  soundest  knowledge  is 
to  know  that  we  know  Him  not  as  indeed  He  is, 
neither  can  know  Him :  and  our  safest  eloquence 
concerning  Him  is  our  silence,  when  we  confess, 
without  confession,  that  His  glory  is  inexplicable.  His 
greatness  above  our  capacity  and  reach.  He  is  above, 
and  we  upon  earth  ;  therefore  it  behoveth  our  words 
to  be  wary  and  few.' 


DEDICA  TION.  xxi 

If  you   find   my  letter  too  discursive,  ascribe  this 
fault  to  my  loyal  zeal  for  the  success  of  a  great  work 
in  which   I   have   had   but  a  small   share,  while  your 
part  in  it  has  been  large  and  important. 
I  am,  my  dear  Dr.  Scrivener, 

Yours  most  sincerely, 

B.  H.  KENNEDY. 


CONTENTS. 


SERMON    I. 


■AGK 


The  Interpretation  of  the  Bible i 

SERMON    11. 
The  Revised  Text  .  .        .  .         .     30 

SERMON    III. 
The  Revised  Version 52 

APPENDICES. 

Appendix  1 75 

Appendix  II -91 

Appendix  III.  :  Select  Textual  Correction      .         .         .101 

Postscript        .         .         .         .         •         .         •         •         •         -155 
Note i^i 


SERMON    I. 

THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE  BIBLE.^ 

I  Corinthians  ii.  15. 
The  spiritual  man  jiidgeth  all  things. 

I.  If  we  regard  man  as  a  free  moral  agent, 
and  religion  as  the  method  ordained  by  God  to 
restore  him  to  his  Makers  image,  lost  by  sin, 
it  is  evident  that  in  every  religious  transaction 
there  are  two  factors  operating,  the  divine  and 
the  human.  The  mutual  and  the  joint  opera- 
tion of  these  factors  we  cannot  measure,  because 
the  divine  nature  and  its  workings  lie  beyond 
the  reach  of  human  definition.  We  know  only 
what  is  revealed  to  us  of  them  in  the  Word  of 
God,  and  what  we  are  allowed  to  see  of  their 
results  in  the  li^^es  and  characters  of  men.  The 
highest  phase  of  this  truth — the  sun,  as  it  were, 

^  Parts  I.  and  II.  of  this  Sermon  were  preached  before  the  ^^ 

University  of  Cambridge  in  January  1862.     Parts  I.  and  III.    ^J^^^Vhi 
were  preached  in  Ely  Cathedral  in  July  1881, 

B 


2  SERMON  L 

from  which  all  its  exhibitions  radiate — is  the 
great  doctrine  of  the  Incarnation,  very  God  and 
very  man  united  in  one  Christ.  The  man  Christ 
Jesus  was  thereby  constituted  the  one  Mediator 
between  God  and  man.  The  possibiHty  of 
man's  reunion  with  God  was  objectively  de- 
clared, and  the  means  of  reahsing  it  subjec- 
tively w^ere  brought  within  man's  reach.  In  all 
these  means  the  concurrence  of  the  divine  and 
human  factors  is  again  supposed.  If  we  are 
saved  by  grace  on  the  part  of  God,  it  is  through 
faith  on  our  own  part.  If  the  Spirit  beareth 
witness,  it  is  with  our  spirits.  If  we  work  out 
our  own  salvation,  it  is  while  God  worketh  in 
us  both  to  will  and  to  do.  If  we  pray,  it  is 
because  prayer  is  the  voice  of  faith,  appointed 
to  receive  the  answering  grace  of  God.  And 
the  Sacraments  were  ordained  by  Christ,  partly 
indeed  to  knit  His  servants  together  by  common 
pledges  of  Christian  brotherhood,  but  partly, 
too,  as  solemn  acts,  wherein  divine  grace  and 
human  faith  should  meet  and  co-operate  with 
mysterious  power  and  effect. 

When  we  review  the  various  heresies^  which 
from  time  to  time  have  divided  the  Christian 

^  The  term  '  heresy '  is  used  in  its  ancient  Scriptural  sense 
as  a  sect  or  form  of  doctrine. 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.        3 

Church,  and  those  which  yet  divide  it,  we  per- 
ceive that  most  of  them  arise  from  the  exag- 
geration of  one  of  these  elements  of  relio^ious 
truth  and  action,  to  the  consequent  depreciation 
of  the  other  element. 

Thus,  in  regard  to  the  first  and  cardinal 
doctrine — the  nature  of  our  blessed  Saviour — 
the  Ebionite  heresy,  since  called  Socinian, 
utterly  denied  His  divine  nature ;  while  the 
Arian  and  semi-Arian  heresies  disparaged  it 
in  various  degrees.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
Doketic  heresy  annihilated  our  Lord's  human 
nature ;  and  the  Apollinarian,  Monophysite, 
and  Monotheletic  heresies,  severally,  muti- 
lated that  human  nature  in  some  function.  It 
stands  to  reason,  that  all  erroneous  teaching  in 
regard  to  the  nature  of  our  Lord  and  Saviour 
Jesus  Christ  becomes,  in  its  place  and  propor- 
tion, erroneous  teaching  in  regard  to  that  work 
of  human  redemption  which  was  wrought  in- 
deed, objectively  as  to  each  of  us,  by  Him 
alone,  but  wrought  by  Him  as  very  God  and 
very  man,  united  in  one  Christ. 

If  we  next  look  to  the  work  of  individual 
salvation,  in  which  the  divine  and  the  human 
concur  and  co-operate,  it  will  again  appear,  on 
the  face  of  history,  that  error  has  arisen,  gene- 

B  2 


4  SERMON  I. 

rally,  from  the  exaggeration  of  the  one  element 
to  the  disparagement  of  the  other.  Thus 
Pelaglus  overrated  man's  natural  powers  as  a 
moral  agent,  and  so  detracted  from  the  convert- 
ing and  regenerating  grace  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 
On  the  other  side  the  element  of  human  free- 
dom has  been  Ignored  by  Calvlnlstic  excess  ; 
and  though  it  were  Improper  to  say  that  divine 
prescience  and  power  have  been  overrated,  we 
may  say  it  has  been  forgotten  that  the  finite  mind 
has  no  measure  for  qualities  infinitely  residing 
in  God,  and  no  faculty  of  comprehending,  what 
nevertheless  It  should  believe,  their  harmonious 
coexistence  and  perfect  reconciliation  In  Him. 

The  same  kind  of  error  meets  us  again  in 
the  opinions  which  have  been  held  concerning 
the  Sacraments.  The  Romanist,  on  the  one 
hand,  infers  grace  from  the  outward  work  alone, 
to  the  neglect  of  human  faith  :  the  Zwinglian, 
on  the  other,  treats  them  as  mere  acts  of 
human  obedience,  having  no  promise  of  special 
grace. 

What  then,  it  will  naturally  be  asked,  is  our 
test  of  truth  in  these  questions,  and  what  our 
rule  of  duty?  Surely  It  Is  our  wisdom  to  believe 
that  each  of  these  doctrines  is  a  great  and  holy 
mystery,   which  we  can  see   only  In  part,  and 


THE  INTERPRETATION   OF   THE  BIBLE.        5 

concerning  which  we  can  prophesy  only  in  part, 
while  we  are  yet  clothed  with  this  body  of  decay 
and  death.  Surely  it  is  our  duty  to  accept  fully, 
and  fully,  as  far  as  we  are  enabled,  to  act  upon, 
both  those  elements  which  Holy  Scripture 
shows  to  us  as  coexisting  and  co-operating- ;  and 
not  to  beat  our  wings  against  the  cage,  wasting 
our  moral  and  intellectual  strength  in  contro- 
versies, of  which  we  '  find  no  end,  in  wandering 
mazes  lost'  Such  controversies,  alas  !  are  often 
worse  than  unpractical  ;  they  have  proved,  and 
in  some  cases  still  prove,  to  be  *  logomachies,  of 
which  Cometh  envy,  strife,  railings,  evil  surmis- 
ings.'  Let  us  escape  from  them  by  use  of  the 
clue  which  our  Church  has  'wisely  and  kindly 
given  in  her  1 7th  Article,  '  receiving  God's  pro- 
mised in  such  wise  as  they  be  generally  set 
forth  to  us  in  Holy  Scripture,  and,  in  our 
doings,  following  that  will  of  God  which  we 
have  expressly  declared  unto  us  in  the  Word  of 
God; 

There  are  two  other  important  and  mutually 
related  questions  of  religion,  in  which  again  we 
have  to  recognise  the  presence  of  the  divine 
and  human  factors,  without  venturing  to  deter- 
mine the  precise  mode  and  degree  in  which 
they  severally  operate.      These  questions  are 


6  SERMON  I. 

the  inspiration   and   the   interpretation    of   the 
Holy  Scriptures. 

Divine  inspiration  is  a  property,  expressly 
ascribed  by  St.  Paul  to  the  writings  of  the  Old 
Testament,  and  justly  inferred  of  those  of  the 
New,  from  our  Saviour's  promises,  and  from 
the  character  of  the  writers.  Attempt  has  often 
been  made,  and  still  is  made,  to  define  the 
manner  and  extent  of  this  inspiration.  No  such 
attempt  has  been  established  as  a  norm  in  the 
Church,  and  we  verily  believe  that,  as  else- 
where, so  here,  the  nature  of  the  case  precludes 
accurate  definition.  The  nearest  approach  to  a 
rule  will  probably  be  that  which  shall  most  dis- 
tinctly recognise  the  constant  presence  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  with  the  sacred  writers,  without 
denying  the  free  development  of  their  human 
faculties  in  the  work  of  authorship.  '  It  seemed 
good  to  the  Holy  Ghost  and  to  us,'  said  the 
apostles  in  their  first  council ;  thus  claiming  the 
sanction  of  the  Holy  Ghost  for  the  collective 
decision  of  their  inspired  minds,  and  yet  ex- 
pressing their  individual  judgment  as  persons 
who  had  exercised  free  thought  and  discussion.^ 

^  The  notion  of  ^  verbal '  inspiration,  not  yet  abandoned 
universally,  is  too  palpably  absurd  to  require  serious  refutation. 
If  the  authors  were  thus  prompted,  what  of  the  countless  tran- 
scribers and  translators,  whose  varying  copies  are  received  as 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.        7 

The  broad  principles  of  Biblical  interpreta- 
tion are  analogous  to  those  of  inspiration.  The 
Bible  is  to  be  interpreted  by  the  employment 
of  the  human  faculties  under  divine  assistance 
and  direction.  We  place  no  limit  to  the  use 
of  man's  learning,  acuteness,  and  industry,  as 
means  to  an  end,  in  determining  the  text  of  the 
Bible,  and  in  ascertaining  its  sense,  gramma- 
tically, logically,  historically  ;  but  after  all — con- 
fronting the  charge  of  mysticism,  which  we 
expect  from  the  worshippers  of  human  reason 
— we  say  that  spiritual  things  can  be  fully 
explained  by  the  Spirit  alone ;  and  that,  con- 
sequently, none  but  spiritual  men  are  qualified 
to  form  an  accurate  judgment  of  the  great  truths 
of  salvation. 

Let  us  turn  our  attention  now  to  the  very 
important  passage  in  which  my  text  occurs. 

In  his  First  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians,  St. 
Paul,  after  reproving  the  Christians  of  Corinth 
for  their  sectarian  divisions,  reminds  them  that 
he  himself  had  preached  to  them  the  plain  vital 
doctrine  of  Christ  and  Him  crucified,  a  stum- 
bllngblock  to  the  Jews,  who  desired  a  sign — that 

Holy  Writ  ?  Of  every  Bible  it  niay  be  said,  '  Herein  is  divine 
truth,  but  alloyed  with  human  error,  which  we  must  strive  to 
clear  away  by  all  the  means  given  to  us  for  the  welfare  of  our 

souls.' 


8  SERMON  I. 

Is,  a  striking  manifestation  of  power ;  and  fool- 
ishness to  the  Greeks,  who  loved  philosophic 
speculation.  At  Corinth  St.  Paul  had  chiefly 
to  dread  the  Greek  error.  He  therefore  goes 
on  to  say  that,  In  setting  forth  the  doctrine  of 
Christ  and  Him  crucified,  he  had  purposely 
abstained  from  the  rhetorical  display  of  mere 
human  learning,  that  he  might  more  distinctly 
exhibit  the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  Yet  (he 
says)  I  preach  a  true  wisdom,  hidden  from  the 
ereat  ones  of  this  world,  but  revealed  to  Chris- 
tians  by  the  Spirit  of  God  ;  for  '  the  Spirit 
searcheth  all  things,  yea,  the  deep  things  of 
God.' 

The  passage,  which  all  but  follows,  extend- 
ing from  the  12th  verse  of  the  second  to  the 
4th  verse  of  the  third  chapter,  I  will  now  ven- 
ture to  read,  with  that  amount  of  paraphrase, 
and  those  variations  from  the  Authorised  Ver- 
sion, which  are  required  to  exhibit  the  view  I 
have  been  led  to  take  of  its  meaning. 

'  Now  we  apostles  of  Christ  received  not 
that  inspiration  which  men  of  the  world  re- 
ceive, making  them  subtle  disputants,  eloquent 
speakers,  and  fine  writers,  but  the  Inspiration 
which  Is  from  God ;  that  we  may  know  the 
blessings  bestowed  upon  us   by  the  grace   of 


THE   INTERPRETATIOh    OF   THE  BIBLE.       9 

God.  And  these  things  we  speak  In  words  not 
taught  of  human  wisdom,  but  taught  of  divine 
inspiration,  explaining  spiritual  things  to  spiritual 
men.  For  the  natural  (that  is,  the  merely  intel- 
lectual) man  receiveth  not  the  things  of  the 
Spirit  of  God,  for  they  are  foolishness  unto  him : 
neither  can  he  know  them,  because  they  are  to 
be  judged  in  a  spiritual  manner.  But  the 
spiritual  man  Is  able  to  form  a  judgment  on  all 
these  points,  while  the  natural  man  has  no 
power  to  judge  him.  For  who,  as  Isaiah  says, 
knoweth  the  mind  or  spirit  of  the  Lord,  so  that 
he  shall  instruct  Him  ?  And  we  who  are  true 
Christians  have  that  mind  or  spirit  of  the  Lord 
Christ.  So  that  no  natural  man  can  correct  us. 
And  yet,  brethren,  I  could  not  speak  to  you  as 
to  spiritual  men,  but  I  had  to  speak  to  you  as 
carnal  men,  as  infant  Christians.  I  fed  you 
with  milk,  not  with  meat,  for  hitherto  ye  could 
not  bear  it.  Nor  can  ye  now  :  for  ye  are  yet 
carnal.  For  whereas  there  is  among  you  jealousy 
and  strife,  are  ye  not  carnal,  and  walking  in  the 
steps  of  unrenewed  man  ?  ' 

St.  Paul,  in  short,  says  that  the  power 
which  the  Spirit  gives  to  a  Christian  is  some- 
thing different  from  mere  human  power  :  that 
it    makes    him    able    to    understand,   and,   if   a 


lo  SERMON  I. 

preacher,  to  explain  spiritual  things  :  but  that 
his  hearers  cannot  understand  him  unless  they 
too  are  spiritual  :  and,  in  so  far  as  they  are  still 
carnal,  they  must  be  reared  and  trained  in  ele- 
mentary doctrines  like  infants,  till  the  mind  of 
Christ  be  developed  within  them. 

By  the  psychic  or  natural  man  St.  Paul 
means  the  unconverted  possessor  of  mere 
human  learning  and  science,  having  specially 
in  view  the  Greek  philosopher.  He  does  not 
intend  to  say  that  the  Christian  can  acquire  no 
useful  knowledge  from  an  infidel  (for  indeed  we 
may  learn  Hebrew  from  the  Jew  or  Arabic 
from  the  Mahometan) ;  but  he  implies  that  the 
infidel,  to  whom  the  faith  and  hope  and  love  of 
the  Christian  are  known  only  by  name,  can 
form  no  just  notion  of  the  Christian  character, 
and  contribute  nothing  to  its  instruction,  edifica- 
tion, and  completion.  In  respect  to  Biblical 
/  interpretation,  the  infidel  may,  perchance,  assist 
i  us  to  explain  the  letter,  but  he  can  throw  no 
I  light  on  the  spirit,  of  the  Bible. 

Again,  we  find  Christians  themselves  cited 
by  the  apostle  in  this  place  under  three  several 
heads  or  classes.  First,  we  have  spiritual  men 
who,  like  St.  Paul  and  his  fellow-labourers, 
speak  and   explain  spiritual   things  :  next,   we 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE  BIBLE.      ii 

have  spiritual  men  to  whom  such  things  are 
explained,  and  who  are  competent  to  form  a 
right  judgment  thereof:  and  lastly,  we  have 
Infant  Christians,  babes  In  Christ,  whom  the 
apostle  could  not  address  as  spiritual,  but  as 
carnal ;  yet  Christians  still,  and  included  among 
those  whom,  in  his  preface,  St.  Paul  had  termed 
'the  Church  of  God,  called  to  be  saints.' 

Now  (to  speak^  of  the  last  class  in  the  first 
place)  does  not  the  language  of  St.  Paul  In 
dealing  with  such  men  teach  the  same  doctrine 
which  we  learn  from  our  Lord's  parables  of  the 
tares,  the  net,  and  the  vine  :  the  same  which 
we  deduce  also  from  the  presence  of  a  traitor 
among  His  disciples  :  namely,  that  those  who 
have  been  received  into  the  Church,  though 
they  be  carnal,  are  not  on  that  account  to  be 
dealt  with  as  heathens,  but  to  be  corrected, 
strengthened,  and  restored.  If  so  it  may  be,  by 
wise  and  kind  discipline  ?  We  should  further 
observe,  that  all  professing  Christians  are  in 
charity  to  be  considered  and  dealt  with  as 
spiritual  men,  except  so  far  as  they  give  by 
their  walk  and  conduct  unquestionable  evidence 
of  being  carnal.  St.  Paul  does  not  speak  to 
these  Corinthians  as  being  carnal  and  not  spiri- 
tual, without  stating  his  grounds  for  so  speak- 


12  SERMON  1. 

ing  :  '  There  is  jealousy  and  strife  among  you.' 
Never,  never  let  us  lay  a  snare  for  the  con- 
science of  a  Christian  brother  by  requiring  of 
him  any  other  test  of  spirituality  than  that  of 
Christian  conduct,  which  our  Saviour  has  sanc- 
tioned :  *  By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know  them.' 
When  plain  proof  of  carnality  is  absent,  let  us 
hope  all  things  of  their  spiritual  state,  judging 
not,  that  we  be  not  judged. 

For  let  us  not  extend  too  widely  the  mean- 
ing and  application  of  our  text.  A  Roman 
Pope,  Boniface  VIII.,  had  the  hardihood  to 
claim  for  the  Roman  See  supreme  jurisdiction 
in  all  causes,  civil  as  well  as  ecclesiastical,  by 
virtue  of  the  maxim  that  '  the  spiritual  man 
judgeth  all  things.'  His  successor  In  our  days 
may  perhaps  have  founded  upon  the  same 
maxim  the  right  of  promulgating  a  new  dogma 
of  Christian  faith  without  the  sanction  of  a 
General  Council.^  We  mention  such  extrava- 
gances only  to  show  to  what  extent  the  Bible 
has  been,  and  may  be,  misinterpreted  by  erring 


^  The  allusion  here  is  to  the  dogma  of  the  '  Immaculate  Con- 
ception of  the  Virgin,'  sanctioned  by  Pope  Pius  IX.  This  claim 
he  subsequently  carried  to  its  fatal  extreme,  by  obtaining,  in 
1869,  the  sanction  of  what  he  was  pleased  to  call  a  General 
Council,  to  the  doctrine  (till  then  repudiated  by  all  but  the 
Jesuits)  of  Papal  Infallibility. 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.      13 

men.  Here  the  term  '  all  things/  whether  it 
have  the  Greek  article  or  not,  evidently  implies 
all  those  thino^s,  mentioned  above,  which  God 
has  freely  given  to  them  that  love  Him.  These 
are  the  things  explained  by  the  spiritual 
preacher ;  these  are  the  things  of  which  the 
spiritual  hearer  can  form  a  judgment;  not  the 
mind  and  the  heart  of  a  Christian  brother  :  for 
God  alone  knoweth  the  hearts  of  men.  With 
respect  to  those  spiritual  men,  whose  office  it  is 
in  these  times  to  follow  St.  Paul  and  the  other 
apostles  in  explaining  spiritual  things  to  the 
spiritual,  earnestly  must  we  desire,  earnestly 
should  we  pray,  that  they  may  be  spiritual 
indeed,  preserved  by  the  Holy  Spirit  from  all 
error  and  evil,  guided  into  all  truth,  and  enabled 
to  preach  the  word  with  power.  Yet  we  are 
not  entitled  to  rank  the  very  best  among  them 
— they  certainly  would  not  rank  themselves — 
with  a  Paul,  an  Apollos,  and  a  Cephas  ;  even  as 
a  Paul,  an  Apollos,  and  a  Cephas  would  not 
rank  themselves  with  Christ.  We  dare  not 
class  the  words  of  any  fallible  men  at  any  time 
since  the  apostolic  age — be  the  speakers  ever 
so  good  and  wise  and  learned  and  weighty — 
with  the  inspired  oracles  of  God.  When  such 
men  speak,  let  us  hear  with  reverent  attention, 


14  SERMON  I. 

but,  If  doubt  arise,  we  must  search  the  Scrip- 
tures, as  did  the  Berseans,  to  see  whether  these 
things  be  so.     We  must  search  the  Scriptures 
with    dlHgent    and   thoughtful  study,   yet  with 
deep  humihty  and  with  constant  prayer.      For 
in  this  work  the   divine   and  human  must  go 
together.      The  spiritual  man  alone  is  competent 
to  form  a  correct  judgment  of  spiritual  things. 
By  the  sanctified  soul  the  saving  truths  of  the 
Gospel  will  be  more  distinctly  and  fully  seen 
'  than    by    the    larger    learning    of    the    merely 
intellectual  student.     Yet  the  admission  of  this 
/  principle,  rightly   viewed,   has  no  tendency  to 
I  discourage   or  disparage   the    value    of  human 
[  learning  and  talent  and  industry  In  the  study  of 
'   the   Bible.      For  the  truly  spiritual  man  Is  an 
humble,  a  zealous,  a  conscientious  man ;  and  In 
;  each  character  he  will  neglect  no  means  which 
'  God  has  placed  within  his  reach  of  acquainting 
I  both  himself  and  others  with  the  truth  as  It  Is 
in  Jesus. 

As  regards  the  textual  constitution,  the 
grammatical  and  logical  explanation,  of  the  New 
Testament,  we  must  admit  that  new  results  are 
from  time  to  time  achieved  by  Improved  learn- 
ing and  enlarged  research.  And,  as  lovers  of 
truth   (for,  If  not  such,  we  are  very  unworthy 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.      15 

servants  of  Him  who  is  the  truth  as  well  as  the 
life),  we  ought  to  lament  that  these  results  were 
so  long  restricted  to  the  use  of  the  professed 
divine,  instead  of  being  made,  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible, the  common  property  of  Christians.  Do 
we  not  still  see  the  spurious  verse  of  St.  John's 
first  episde  (t  John  v.  7)  cited  as  genuine,  by 
writers  of  slender  learning,  it  is  true,  but  for 
that  very  reason,  perhaps,  the  more  popular  in 
an  age  of  shallow  reading  ?  Is  not  St.  Paul's 
evidence  still  quoted  in  terms  which  he  did  not 
use  :  '  God  was  manifest  in  the  flesh  '  ?  And 
are  not  the  great  divine  truths  themselves  liable 
to  be  injured  by  this  abuse,  when  the  student 
discovers  that  texts  which  he  has  been  wont  to 
hear  cited  as  normal  are  not  Biblical  texts  at 
all  ?  Yet  superficial  or  bigoted  minds  may  still 
claim  the  right  of  quoting  these  texts,  as  long 
as  the  Church  sets  them  before  her  children  as 
genuine  portions  of  the  sacred  volume. 

1 1.  An  eminent  writer  of  the  day  very  justly 
cautions  his  readers  against  the  idle  or  fallacious 
use  of  Scriptural  language.  One  such  instance 
I  have  given  in  the  misapplication  of  the  words 
of  my  text  by  Pope  Boniface.  But  indeed  of 
such  misapplications  the  name  is  legion.  What 
text  is  oftener  cited  and  preached  upon  than  the 


i6  SERMON  I. 

words  '  Search  the  Scriptures  '  ?  yet  the  logic 
of  the  context  requires  us  to  read,  '  Ye  search 
the  Scriptures  : '  and  we  fear  the  translators 
were  dazzled  by  the  apparent  value  of  the  im- 
perative sense  as  a  weapon  against  Romanism. 
'  Comparing  spiritual  things  with  spiritual ' 
were  the  words  prefixed  to  the  Sermons  on 
Scripture  coincidences  by  one  whose  memory 
we  all  revere  and  love.  My  view  of  the  con- 
text has  obliged  me  to  render  the  Greek  other- 
wise :  '  explaining  spiritual  things  to  spiritual 
men  :  '  as  in  the  ist  verse  of  the  twelfth  chapter 
the  context  again  Induces  me  to  read  '  spiritual 
persons  '  rather  than  '  spiritual  things.'  The 
value  of  Professor  Blunt's  sermons  was  alto- 
gether independent  of  his  text :  but  his  high 
sanction  seemed  to  be  given  to  an  erroneous 
translation.  Far  more  momentous  was  the 
error  of  the  great  Augustine,  when,  being  igno- 
rant of  Greek,  and  following  the  Latin  Vulgate, 
he  argued  the  Imputation  of  Adam's  sin  to  his 
descendants  from  a  mistranslation  of  the  12th 
verse  of  the  fifth  chapter  of  Romans  ;  rendering 
'  in  whom  all  sinned '  Instead  of  *  inasmuch  as 
all  sinned.' — Take  another  instance.  The  very 
words  of  St.  Paul  In  this  Epistle  to  the  Corin- 
thians,— '  we  preach  Christ  crucified,'  and  again, 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE   BIBLE.     17 

*  I  determined  not  to  know  any  thing  among 
you,  save  Jesus  Christ,  and   Him  crucified,' — in 
how   many  sermons   have  they  been   made    a 
groundwork  for  the  doctrine  of  the  Atonement, 
as  the  great  cardinal  work  of  Christ !    Yet  these 
texts   afford   no   basis   either  for  that  doctrine 
itself,  or  for  its  claim  to  supreme  importance  in 
Christ's   redeeming  work.     St.   Paul  means  to 
aver  that  he  has  preached  the  truth  as  it  is  in 
Jesus  fully  and  honestly,  not  hiding  or  sophis 
ticating  it  to  flatter  human  prejudice.     Had  his 
galnsayers  been  Sadducees,  he  would  perhaps 
have  said,   'We  preach  Christ,  and   Him  risen 
from  the  dead.'     As  they  are  proud  Pharisaic 
Jews,  and  proud  intellectual  Greeks,  he  says,  we 
preach    Christ,    and     Him    crucified,    however 
offensive   to  some,  and  foolish  to  others,  this 
doctrine  of  a  crucified  King  and  Saviour  may 
appear.     The  great  lesson  which  St.    Paul  so 
teaches  these  proud  men  is — that  of  self-humilia- 
tion  in   face  of  the  true  power  and  wisdom  of 
God  :  even    as   in   his  second    chapter   to    the 
Philippians  the  lesson  he  teaches  is  that  of  self- 
sacrifice,  in  view  of  the  great  example  of  Christ. 
'  Let  this  mind,  this  unselfish  sympathetic  mind, 
be  in  you,  which  was  also  in  Christ  Jesus,  who, 
subsisting  in  the  form  of  God,  deemed  not  the 

C 


1 8  SERMON  I. 

being  like  God  a  miser's  treasure,  a  thing  not  to 
be  parted  with ;  but  put  off  His  dignity  by 
taking  a  servant's  form,  being  born  in  human 
semblance  :  and  when  He  was  so  found  as  a 
man  in  outward  guise,  He  humbled  Himself  yet 
further,  and  became  submissive  even  unto 
death,  and  that  death  the  shameful  and  bitter 
death  of  the  cross/ 

If  we  turn  to  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans, 
chap.  viii.  '^'i^,  34,  we  shall  see  (I  venture  to 
think)  that  the  clauses  rendered  in  our  version 
'  It  is  God  that  justifieth,'  '  it  is  Christ  that 
died,'  should  have  the  interrogative  form,  '  Will 
God  that  justifieth  '  (accuse  them)  ?  '  will  Christ 
that  died  '  (condemn  them)  ? 

Proceeding  to  Phil.  iii.  16,  I  cannot  but 
believe  that  this  verse  ought  to  be  taken  as  a 
preamble  to  the  17th  :  '  Nevertheless,  seeing  we 
have  thus  far  attained  (in  our  lessons  of  Chris- 
tian duty) — to  walk  by  the  same  rule — be  ye 
with  one  consent  imitators  of  me,'  &c. 

It  must  be  admitted  that  some  translations 
in  our  English  Bible  have  a  purely  ecclesias- 
tical character ;  that  is,  they  have  been  accom- 
modated to  some  doctrine  which  hearers  and 
readers  in  later  times  would  recognise,  but 
which  was  certainly  not  recognised  by  those  to 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE  BIBLE      19 

whom  the  words  were  first  spoken.  Such  are 
the  passages  Matt.  i.  18,  Luke  i.  35,  where  the 
phrase  '  Pneuma  hagion  '  (holy  Spirit)  Is  ren- 
dered '  the  Holy  Ghost.'  Whether  this  render- 
ing, In  the  absence  of  the  article,  Is  ungramma- 
tical  or  not,  I  shall  not  pretend  to  determine. 
Middleton  condemns  it.  But  we  must  surely 
allow  it  to  be  unhlstorical.  The  doctrine  of  the 
Holy  Trinity,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost  as  the 
Third  Person  in  the  Godhead,  was  not  known 
to  Joseph  and  Mary,  who  are  severally  addressed 
by  the  angel  In  these  passages.  By  'holy 
Spirit '  they  would  naturally  understand  '  a 
divine  Inspiration  or  influence,'  that  '  power  of 
the  Highest '  by  which  the  angel  virtually  Inter- 
prets the  phrase  in  the  passage  of  Luke.  *  Holy 
Spirit  of  God'  might  with  advantage  replace 
the  words  '  Holy  Ghost.' 

In  Rom.  Ix.  3-5  we  read  In  our  Bibles 
the  following  words  :  '  For  I  could  wish  that 
myself  were  accursed  from  Christ  for  my 
brethren,  my  kinsmen  according  to  the  flesh  : 
who  are  Israelites ;  to  whom  pertaineth  the 
adoption,  and  the  glory,  and  the  covenants,  and 
the  giving  of  the  law,  and  the  service  of  God, 
and  the  promises  ;  whose  are  the  fathers,  and 
of  whom  as  concerning  the  flesh  Christ  came, 

c  2 


20  SERMON  L 

who  Is  over  all,  God  blessed  for  ever.'  If  this 
version  be  correct,  then  we  have  here  the  only 
place  In  which  St.  Paul  has  said  of  our  Lord 
Jesus  Christ,  In  express  predication,  that  '  He 
is  God,'  and  with  the  strong  addition  and 
ascription,  'over  all,  blessed  forever.'  It  seems 
quite  Incredible  that  the  apostle  would  choose, 
for  such  a  momentous  isolated  declaration,  a 
place  like  this,  where  he  Is  consoling  the  Jews 
by  an  enumeration  of  the  special  privileges 
which  belonged  to  them  as  Jews,  the  last  of 
these  being  that  from  among  them  should  arise 
the  Christ,  the  Messiah.  For  to  suppose  that 
the  final  words  describe  this  Christ  as  God 
would  then  necessarily  imply  that  the  Jews  ex- 
pected their  Messiah  to  be  '  God  over  all,  blessed 
for  ever  ; '  an  expectation  which  they  certainly 
did  not  entertain,  for  it  would  seem  to  them 
then  (as  it  seems  now)  at  variance  with  their 
fundamental  doctrine  :  '  Hear,  O  Israel ;  the 
Lord  your  God  Is  one  God.'  And  the  modifi- 
cation of  this  doctrine  in  the  Christian  Creed 
Paul  would  surely  not  introduce  here  without 
some  previous  preparation,  without  some  fuller 
explanation.  This  rendering  we  must  therefore 
regard  as  one  of  an  ecclesiastical  character, 
adopted  with  too  much  eagerness,  in  order  to 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE  BIBLE.      21 

obtain  for  an  important  doctrine  of  the  Creed 
another  positive  sanction.  I  entertain  httle 
doubt  that  the  words  '  Christ  came '  should  be 
followed  by  a  full  stop ;  the  next  clause,  an 
ascription  of  glory,  being  rendered,  '  He  who  is 
over  all  is  God,  blessed  for  ever.     Amen.' 

Biblical  criticism,  my  brethren,  is  among  the 
most  sacred  duties  of  the  Christian  scholar  :  a 
duty  to  be  discharged  frankly  and  faithfully,  as 
under  the  eye  of  God.  Faithless  criticism  may 
be  learned,  may  be  sagacious,  may  often  be 
overruled  by  God  to  expose  falsehood  or  to 
suggest  and  illustrate  truth  ;  but  as  it  is  without 
the  divine  element,  it  sees  and  knows  nothing 
of  divine  things.  The  blind  cannot  lead  the 
blind.  Faithless  criticism  is  of  the  earth,  earthy  : 
it  seems  to  flourish  and  flaunt  for  a  while,  but  its 
fashion  soon  passeth  away.  The  cold  and  per- 
verse rationalism  of  Semler  and  his  school,  the 
ingenious  dreams  of  Strauss  and  the  Hegelians 
— where  are  they  now  ?  They  are  gone  like 
the  chaff  which  the  wind  scattereth  :  and  the 
truth  as  it  is  in  Jesus  is  a  glad  sound  once  more 
in  the  fatherland  of  Luther  and  Melancthon. 

The  spiritual  man  judgeth  all  things. 
Brethren  of  the  laity,  it  is  your  privilege  and 
your  duty  to   study  in  the  Bible,  to  hear  from 


22  SERMON  L 

the  pulpit,  the  blessings  bestowed  upon  you  by 
the  grace  of  God.  Be  spiritual  men.  So  shall 
ye  be  able  to  judge  spiritually  what  ye  read  and 
hear,  taking  heed  how  ye  read  and  how  ye  hear. 
Brethren  of  the  clergy,  and  ye  who  are  looking 
forward  to  the  sacred  office,  it  is,  or  it  may  be, 
your  high  privilege  and  duty  to  explain  spiritual 
things.  Be  spiritual  men.  So  alone  will  ye  be 
able  to  divide  rightly  the  word  of  truth,  and  to 
minister  grace  unto  your  hearers. 

Be  spiritual  men.  But  how  ?  In  part  by 
humbly  believing  and  remembering  that  the 
answer  to  this  question  is  a  mystery.  '  The 
wind  bloweth  where  it  listeth,  and  ye  hear  the 
sound  thereof,  but  ye  cannot  tell  whence  it 
Cometh,  or  whither  it  goeth  :  even  so  is  every 
man  that  is  born  of  the  Spirit.'  In  part  by 
neglecting  none  of  the  means  of  grace  prepared 
for  Christians  in  the  Church  of  Christ — prayer, 
worship,  and  the  communion  of  the  bpdy  and 
blood  of  Christ.  In  part  by  being  willing — 
willing  in  heart,  willing  in  body,  soul,  and  mind 
— to  do  the  will  of  the  Father,  and  to  work  out 
your  own  salvation  with  fear  and  trembling,  yea, 
with  the  deepest  humility,  because  it  is  God  that 
worketh  in  you  both  to  will  and  to  do  of  His 
good  pleasure.     In  part  also  by  remembering 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE   BIBLE,     23 

that  Spiritual  grace  is  not  given  at  once  in  its 
full  proportion  ;  that,  to  be  maintained,  it  must 
be  improved ;  that  we  must  not  stand  still,  if 
we  would  not  go  backward  ;  that  the  Christian 
life,  as  described  in  the  Epistle  for  this  day's 
service,  is  a  race  for  the  prize  of  an  imperish- 
able crown,  and  they  who  run  it  must  be  tem- 
perate in  all  things.  Most  of  all  must  those 
be  tem.perate  whose  high  and  hard  and  most 
responsible  function  it  is  to  explain  spiritual 
things,  lest  that  by  any  means,  when  they  have 
preached  unto  others,  they  themselves  should 
be  cast  away. 

May  the  Holy  Spirit  breathe  upon  our  dis- 
tracted Church,  and  create  in  it  spiritual  minis- 
ters and  spiritual  congregations,  that  carnal 
jealousies  and  strifes  may  die  away,  and  all 
things  belonging  to  the  Spirit  may  live  and 
grow  amongst  us  :  that  each  Christian  may  be 
one  with  Christ,  and  all  Christians  one  in 
Christ;  and  that  Christ  Himself,  our  incarnate 
Mediator,  our  crucified  Redeemer,  our  risen 
Head,  our  glorified  and  reigning  King,  may 
be  all  in  all,  to  the  glory  of  God  the  Father ! 
Amen.^] 

^  This  concludes  the  sermon  as  preached  before  the  Univer- 
sity of  Cambridge  in  January  1861. 


24      ■  SERMON  I. 

III.  My  brethren,  the  words  which  I  have 
so  far  addressed  to  you  are  my  own  words, 
though  read  from  a  printed  volume.  The 
sermon  to  which  they  belong  was  preached  by 
me  in  the  University  pulpit  at  Cambridge,  on 
January  27,  1861,  more  than  twenty  years  ago. 
At  that  time  I  little  guessed  that  a  revision 
would  be  undertaken  in  my  lifetime,  and  that 
I  myself  should  be  called  to  take  part  in  the 
execution  of  such  a  work.  Yet  that  work  has 
been  undertaken,  has  been  completed  in  the 
course  of  eleven  years  and  a  half,  and  the  new 
version  so  revised  has  now  for  many  weeks 
been  before  the  eyes  of  the  Scripture-reading 
public  of  Great  Britain  and  America.  It  is 
at  this  moment,  and  for  a  long  time  yet  it  may 
continue  to  be,  subject  to  a  storm  of  criticism, 
of  which  we  must  wait  to  see  the  consistency, 
the  scope,  and  the  reasons,  before  we  can  attempt 
to  organise  a  defence,  and  to  obtain  a  fair  hearing 
before  the  tribunals  of  sound  learning,  upright 
intelligence,  and  enlightened  wisdom. 

Meanwhile  it  is  well  that  English  congrega- 
tions should  learn  as  much  as  can  be  told  them 
from  the  pulpit  about  this  important  volume  : 
why  it  was  wanted,  what  it  does  to  meet  that 
want,  and  in  what  respects  it  is  adapted  to  pro- 


THE   INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.      2$ 

mote  true  religion ;  and  its  faults  (for  what 
human  work  is  faultless  ?)  should  be  noted  with 
a  view  to  correction.  As  the  volume  is  printed 
and  published  in  several  sizes,  and  at  varied 
prices,  it  is  fairly  within  the  reach  of  all  readers 
except  the  very  poorest ;  and  I  may  venture  to 
hope  that  most  of  those  who  hear  me  will  soon 
become  acquainted  with  it,  and  by  studying  its 
clear  and  careful  preface  will  learn  all  they 
ought  to  know  respecting  its  origin,  its  design, 
and  the  general  rules  by  which  the  revisers 
have  been  guided  in  the  performance  of  their 
work. 

As  one  of  the  revisers,  I  stand  in  a  delicate 
position  when  I  venture  to  add  anything  to 
what  is  said  by  our  collective  voice  In  that  pre- 
face. But  our  excellent  chairman,  the  Bishop 
of  Gloucester  and  Bristol,  has  spoken  more 
fully  on  the  subject  from  his  place  in  Convoca- 
tion. I  have  read  what  he  there  said,  which 
of  course  forms  part  of  the  stock  of  public 
information.  It  Is  well  known  that  our  whole 
company  consisted  of  some  twenty-five  or 
twenty-six  members,  resident  In  various  parts 
of  Great  Britain,  engaged  in  various  public 
duties,  and  not  all  of  them,  always  able  to 
attend  the  meetings  In  the  Jerusalem  Chamber, 


26  SERMON  L 

which  were  held  on  forty  days  of  every  year. 
The  average  attendance  might  be  about  seven- 
teen members,  but  I  speak  without  certain 
knowledge,  and  from  mere  conjecture.  The 
members  unable  to  attend  were  at  liberty 
to  communicate  their  opinions  in  writing  on 
any  passages  which  specially  interested  them, 
and  such  communications  always  received  very 
careful  attention.  A  committee  of  American 
divines  was  in  session  at  New  York  for  the 
purpose  of  regular  communication  with  us. 
Their  notes  were  sent  across  the  Atlantic, 
printed,  circulated,  read,  and  carefully  discussed 
in  our  meetings.  Our  whole  work  was  gone 
over  twice  with  thorough  deliberation  ;  all  differ- 
ences of  opinion  were  settled  by  the  votes  of 
the  members  present,  and  in  the  second  revi- 
sion a  majority  of  two-thirds  was  required  to 
overrule  the  Authorised  Version  if  any  member 
thought  proper  to  demand  that  advantage.  It 
is  important  for  you  to  observe  that  the  mar- 
ginal renderings  introduced  by  the  conjunction 
or  always  represent  the  opinion  of  a  minority 
present,  though  such  a  margin  was  not  neces- 
sarily granted,  and  the  minority,  when  very 
small,  rarely  asked  for  it. 

Personally  speaking  (and  I  am  sure  every 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF   THE  BIBLE.      27 

reviser  would  say  the  same  thing)  I  do  not  feel 
myself  at  liberty,  as  a  loyal  comrade,  to  say 
where  I  voted  with  the  majority,  where  with 
the  minority ;  that  is,  I  cannot  loyally  call  in 
question  the  decisions  of  the  company.  But  I 
am  in  a  peculiar  position  on  account  of  this 
sermon,  in  the  course  of  which  I  expressed 
opinions  on  a  certain  number  of  passages  in  the 
Authorised  Version.  Some  of  those  opinions 
are  recognised  as  just  by  the  changes  made  in 
revision  ;  others  appear  in  the  margin  ;  one  or 
two  have  gained  no  recognition.  But  all  these 
opinions,  deliberately  formed  and  expressed 
twenty  years  ago,  I  have  not  changed.  I  hold 
them  still.  A  short  time  before  the  close  of 
our  labours  I  called  the  attention  of  the  com- 
pany to  this  sermon,  desiring  to  know  whether, 
in  publicly  maintaining  opinions  publicly  ex- 
pressed long  ago,  without  any  reference  to  a 
revised  version,  I  should  be  In  any  respect  vio- 
lating my  loyal  duty  as  a  reviser.  No  formal 
answer  could  be  given  to  this  question,  but  not 
a  voice  was  raised  in  contradiction  to  the  lan- 
guage of  the  chairman,  which  intimated  that  no 
such  imputation  could  attach  to  me  for  so  acting. 
It  is  not  my  purpose  to  bring  forward  any  of 
those  passages  now,  saving  only  that  one  which 


28  SERMON  I. 

grows  out  of  the  text,  viz.  i  Cor.  i.  13,  '  Inter- 
preting or  explaining  spiritual  things  to  spiritual 
men.'  This  rendering  stands  in  our  margin. 
I  would  have  wished  it  in  the  text,  because  I 
think  that  the  two  following  verses  imperiously 
call  for  it — in  fact,  prove  and  enforce  its  truth. 
This,  I  say,  is  the  only  instance  in  which  I  shall 
express  a  dissentient  private  judgment  to-day. 
I  do  so  because  it  cannot  be  well  helped,  be- 
cause it  is  in  print  already,  and  because  I  feel 
myself  licensed  to  express  this  opinion  without 
infringement  of  loyal  duty. 

In  my  next  discourse  I  hope  to  bring  to 
your  notice  the  manner  in  which  the  revisers 
have  done  the  work  entrusted  to  them — the  re- 
constitution,  that  is,  of  the  Authorised  Version. 
This  will  lead  us  to  consider  two  points  :  first, 
our  corrections  of  that  Greek  text  which  the 
companies  of  161 1  followed  in  translating; 
secondly,  our  corrections  of  the  Authorised 
Version  itself,  adopted  as  either  essential  or 
desirable. 

But  while  I  invite  you  to  hear  what  I  have 
to  say  upon  the  right  interpretation  of  those 
Holy  Scriptures  which  are  profitable  for  in- 
struction in  righteousness,  and  able,  if  rightly 
used,  to  make  us  wise  unto  salvation,  I  must 


THE  INTERPRETATION  OF  THE  BIBLE,     29 

not  part  from  you  at  this  time  without  recalling 
our  blessed  Lord's  warning  words,  '  Take  heed 
how  ye  hear.'  Bear  in  mind  the  maxim  of  St. 
Paul  in  my  text :  '  The  spiritual  man  judgeth  all 
things.'  You  cannot  judge  aright  without  being 
spiritual  men.  You  cannot  be  spiritual  men 
without  the  grace  of  God's  Holy  Spirit.  That 
grace  you  cannot  hope  to  obtain  without  using 
the  means  appointed  to  that  end,  among  which 
are  the  study  of  God's  Word,  even  of  the  truth 
as  it  is  in  Jesus,  and  the  practice  of  private 
as  well  as  public  prayer.  Search  the  Scriptures, 
then  ;  pray  earnestly  :  pray  especially  for  me, 
that  I  may  be  empowered  to  speak  to  you  as  a 
spiritual  teacher ;  pray  for  yourselves,  that  you 
may  be  enabled  to  judge  my  words  as  spiritual 
hearers. 


30 


SERMON    11. 

THE  REVISED    TEXT. 

St.  John's  Gospel  xix.  22. 
Pilate  answered^  What  I  have  written  I  have  written. 

I.  You  know,  my  Christian  friends,  what 
Pilate  had  written,  and  for  what  purpose  he 
wrote.  Most  of  you  can  travel  back  in  thought 
to  that  'place  of  a  skull'  near  the  city  of  Jeru- 
salem, where  about  eighteen  centuries  and  a 
half  ago  there  was  standing  a  wooden  cross, 
to  which  were  nailed  the  hands — upon  which 
was  stretched  the  tortured  body — from  which 
drooped  the  still  bleeding  brow — of  Him  whom 
the  Roman  centurion  on  guard  pronounced  to 
be  surely  the  Son  of  God  :  of  Him,  in  remem- 
brance of  whose  sacrifice  for  your  sake  many  of 
you  here  present  have  received  in  faith  with 
thanksgiving  those  consecrated  elements  of 
bread  and  wine,  which  His  priests  administer 
with  solemn  prayer  that  the  body  of  Jesus  Christ 


THE  REVISED    TEXT.  31 

given  for  you,  and  the  blood  of  Jesus  Christ  shed 
for  you,  may  preserve  your  bodies  and  souls  unto 
everlasting  life. 

Pilate  had  written  an  inscription  to  be  placed 
upon  that  ever-memorable  cross,  to  be  seen 
above  the  bleeding  head  of  that  tortured  body. 

Varied  as  are  the  Gospel  narratives  of  the 
deed  wrought  on  that  great  Good  Friday  (and 
in  this  variety  we  see  the  proof  of  their  veracity), 
they  are  all  agreed  in  commemorating  this  in- 
scription. One  Evangelist  indeed  commemo- 
rates it  more  fully  than  the  other  three  :  his 
Gospel  was  written  long  after  theirs  ;  but  he 
had  been  an  eye-witness  of  the  scene.  For  he 
it  was  who  had  leaned  on  his  Master's  bosom 
at  the  Last  Supper :  he  had  stood  beside  the 
cross  of  Jesus  :  he  was  the  disciple  whom  Jesus 
loved,  to  whom  Jesus  entrusted  His  mother  : 
he  was  the  apostle  of  love,  the  preacher  of 
Ephesus,  the  aged  exile  of  Patmos,  St.  John, 
the  son  of  Zebedee. 

St.  Matthew  writes  : 

'And  they  set  up  over  His  head  His 
accusation  written,  This  is  Jesus  the 
King  of  the  Jews.' 

St.  Mark  : 

*  And  the  superscription  of  the  accusation 


32  SERMON  II. 

was    written    over,   The  King   of  the 
Jews.' 
In  St.  Luke  we  read  : 

'And  the  soldiers  also  mocked  Him, 
coming  to  Him,  offering  Him  vinegar, 
and  saying,  If  Thou  be  the  King  of  the 
Jews,  save  Thyself.  And  there  was  also 
a  superscription  over  Him :  This  Is 
the  King  of  the  Jews.' 
St.  John's  account  is  : 

'  And  Pilate  wrote  a  title  also,  and  put  It 
on  the  cross.     And  there  was  written, 
Jesus    of   Nazareth    the    King   of  the 
Jews.     This  title  therefore  read  many 
of  the  Jews ;  for  the  place  where  Jesus 
was  crucified  was  near  to  the  city :   and 
It  was  written  In  Hebrew,  and  In  Latin, 
and  in  Greek.     The  chief  priests  of  the 
Jews  therefore   said   to    Pilate,    Write 
not  The    King  of  the  Jews  ;  but  that 
he    said,     I    am    King   of    the    Jews. 
Pilate  answered.  What  I  have  written 
I  have  written.' 
Why  have  I  called  to  your  minds  this  in- 
scription to-day  ?     Not  In  order  to  dwell  now 
on  the  divine  work  then  finished,  with  its  mighty 
causes  and  consequences.     Not  to  draw  moral 


THE  REVISED   TEXT.  33 

warnings  from  the  sin  of  the  wicked  Jews,  or 
from  that  of  Pilate,  In  whose  conduct  and  words 
we  may  surely  trace  Indignation  against  the 
men  who  had  forced  his  hand,  indignation 
against  himself  for  consenting  to  so  heinous  a 
crime  as  the  murder  of  One  in  whom  he  found 
no  fault.  Of  these  thincrs  I  have  treated  In 
other  sermons  which  the  volume,  now  placed 
on  the  shelves  of  yonder  library,  contains. 

I  cite  this  Inscription  as  well  suited  to 
Introduce  the  subject  on  which  I  pledged 
myself  to  preach  this  morning.  If  permitted.  I 
mean  the  text  from  which  our  New  Testament 
has  been  translated  Into  so  many  languages  be- 
sides our  own. 

Pilate's  inscription  was  couched  in  three 
languages — Hebrew.  Latin,  and  Greek.  He- 
brew, I  need  hardly  say,  is  the  language  of 
the  Jews,  that  in  which  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament  are  written.  When  our  Saviour 
was  on  earth,  the  vulgar  speech  of  the  Jewish 
people  had  fallen  off  from  the  old  and  classical 
Hebrew  to  become  a  corrupt  dialect,  known 
as  Syro-Chaldalc  or  Aramaic,  which  bore  to 
the  language  of  Moses  and  David  the  same 
sort   of  relation  that  the    modern    Hindustani 

D 


34  SERMON  II. 

and  Bengali  bear  to  the  older  language  of 
Hindustan,  called  Sanscrit. 

Pilate's  inscription  was  therefore  written  in 
Hebrew,  that  is,  in  the  common  dialect  of  the 
Jewish  populace,  that  it  might  be  read  by  them. 
Probably  he  knew  little  of  it  himself  beyond 
a  smattering  of  the  most  usual  Aramaic  words. 
His  conversations  with  eminent  Jews  would  be 
held  in  a  language  known  to  both  parties — I 
mean  the  Greek. 

The  Latin  language,  that  of  Rome,  was 
the  language  of  the  governor,  of  his  staff, 
and  many  among  his  soldiers.  It  was  the 
official  language  of  Roman  government,  and 
would  not  be  omitted  by  Pilate.  But  the  Jews, 
I  fancy,  would  have  none  of  it,  or  as  little  as 
could  be  helped. 

There  remains  the  third  language  used  in 
this  inscription,  the  Greek.  This,  the  finest 
and  most  flexible  speech  the  world  has  ever 
known,  was  propagated  throughout  the  whole 
East  then  known  to  Europeans,  from  the  Dar- 
danelles to  the  Persian  Gulf,  by  means  of  the 
wonderful  conquests  of  Alexander  the  Great, 
330  years  before  the  Christian  era.  In  the 
kingdoms  of  Egypt  and  Syria,  which  were 
founded  by  the   successors  of  Alexander,  and 


THE  REVISED   TEXT.  35 

flourished  for  a   few  centuries,  Greek  was  the 
language   of  the  conquerors,  and  became  to  a 
great   extent   the   language    of   their   subjects. 
This    result    the    eminently  literary  and    com- 
mercial spirit'  of  Greek  populations  contributed 
powerfully  to  achieve.     The  Jews  indeed  were 
what   the    Books    of    Maccabees    show    them  ; 
what  they  remained  under  the  Romans  ;  what 
they  remained  through  the  Middle  Ages  ;  what 
they  remain  to  this  day — a  peculiar  people,  fond 
of  their  own  language,  their  own  religion,  their 
own  rites  and  customs.     But  Greeks,  with  the 
Greek  tongue,  Greek  dress,  Greek  commerce, 
Greek  habits  and  influences,  were  around  them 
everywhere,  in  Alexandria,  Antloch,  Damascus, 
Tyre,   and  Sidon.     Greeks  were  among  them 
in   Palestine,  especially  In  Jerusalem  itself,  and 
in   trading  seaports    like    Joppa  and   C^sarea. 
The   Hebrew  Scriptures  themselves   had   been 
translated  Into  Greek    by   Jews  who  had    mi- 
grated to   Egypt,  and,  becoming  familiar  with 
the  Greek  tongue,  were  employed  by  Ptolemy 
Phlladelphus  to  execute  this  work.     A  fabulous 
tale    respecting   the    manner   of    its    execution 
by  seventy-two   translators  working  separately 
caused  this  translation  to  be  generally  known  as 
the  Septuagint  Version.     Such  Jews  as  returned 

D  2 


36  SERMON  11. 

to  Palestine,  especially  to  Jerusalem  itself, 
speaking  Greek  and  living  in  Greek  fashion, 
were  called  Hellenists.  In  the  Acts  they  are 
called  '  they  that  fear  God.'  By  such  Hel- 
lenistic Jews  were  written  in  Greek  those 
Apocryphal  books  which  our  Church,  by  her 
6th  Article,  allows  to  be  read  for  example  of 
life  and  instruction  of  manners,  but  does  not 
receive  as  a  rule  of  faith. 

Thus  you  see  that  it  was  quite  necessary 
for  Pilate  to  write  the  inscription  in  Greek. 
In  these  days  French  is  often  called  the  pass- 
port language  of  the  world.  But  much  more 
than  French  now  was  Greek  in  our  Saviour's 
lifetime  on  earth  such  a  passport  language.  It 
was  spoken  by  all  educated  persons  east  cf 
Italy,  and  we  may  almost  say  that  it  was  taught 
to  all  well-educated  persons  in  Italy  itself,  and 
even  in  the  western  states  subject  to  Rome. 
We  do  not  doubt  that  Pilate  knew  and  spoke 
it  well ;  for  so  prudent  an  emperor  as  Tibe- 
rius would  not  have  sent  to  the  government 
of  a  difficult  frontier  province  like  Judaea  a 
man  who  was  not  highly  cultivated  as  well  as 
very  able. 

And  all  well-educated  Jews,  we  doubt  not, 
knew    Greek;  they  could    not  help    doing   so, 


THE  REVISED    TEXT.  yj 

surrounded  as  they  were  by  so  many  to  whom 
it  was  a  current  speech. 

Whether  our  blessed  Lord,  in  His  daily  in- 
tercourse with  the  population  of  Galilee,  used 
Greek  or  Aramaic,  is  a  much-disputed  question, 
which  cannot,  I  fear,  be  settled  beyond  doubt. 
There  seems  to  be  great  a  p7^iori  probability, 
and  in  the  Gospels  themselves  there  are  several 
well-known  indications  pointing  to  the  fact, 
that  He  familiarly  spoke  in  the  Chaldaic  He- 
brew dialect.  But  one  of  our  revising  com- 
pany. Professor  Roberts,  has  written  a  learned 
book  in  favour  of  the  other  hypothesis,  that 
Greek  was  the  language  used  by  Jesus. 

All  Jews  who  sought  to  become  learned 
men  studied  Hebrew  literature  and  law  under 
the  guidance  of  some  emment  Rabbi.  Such 
was  the  training  of  Saul,  afterwards  Paul,  who 
sat  at  the  feet  of  Gamaliel.  As  to  the  disciples 
of  our  blessed  Lord,  called  by  Him  from  the 
humbler  walks  of  life,  we  must  ascribe  their 
culture  as  well  as  the  grace  they  received  to  His 
teaching.  His  society  and  example,  and  the  in- 
fluence of  that  Holy  Spirit  which  furnished 
them  with  the  intellectual  as  well  as  the  moral 
powers  essential  to  their  usefulness  in  the 
apostolic  office.     The  choice   of   Greek   under 


38  SERMON  IT. 

that  influence  for  the  vehicle  of  their  preaching, 
their  epistles,  their  historic  narratives,  is  a  fact 
due  to  the  prevalence  of  that  language,  as  well 
as  to  its  special  excellence.  But  the  Greek  of 
the  New  Testament  is  not  the  subtle,  refined, 
many-stringed  instrument  of  speech,  to  which 
the  great  thinkers  of  Athens,  historians,,  philo- 
sophers, orators,  dramatists,  attuned  the  won- 
drous music  of  their  thought.  Its  style,  espe- 
cially the  style  of  the  four  Gospels,  is  much 
simpler  and  homelier,  so  to  say,  than  that  of  a 
Plato,  a  Demosthenes,  or  even  of  a  Xenophon. 
The  grandeur  of  these  sacred  books  is  not  to  be 
found  in  the  region  of  high-wrought  human 
language,  but  in  that  of  divine  truth  taught  to 
mankind  in  simple  words.  New  Testament 
Greek  is  called  Hellenistic — like  that  of  the 
Septuagint  translation  and  the  Apocryphal 
books. 

It  is,  indeed,  a  very  ancient  and  by  no  means 
improbable  tradition  that  St.  Matthew's  Gospel 
was  originally  written  in  Aramaic  Hebrew,  and 
afterwards  translated  into  Greek  either  by  him- 
self or  by  another  hand.  This  question  is  of 
litde  concern  to  our  present  subject ;  for  as  the 
Hebrew  document  (if  there  was  such)  is  lost, 
and  the  Greek  alone  remains   to    us,   scholars 


THE  REVISED    TEXT.  39 

have  to  deal  with  It  as  Greek,  like  all  the  other 
books  of  the  New  Testament. 

The  criticism  of  N.  T.  Greek  is  therefore  a 
peculiar  work,  different  in  some  degree  from 
that  of  the  writings  called  classical.  It  requires 
special  reading  and  acquirement,  which  are 
among  the  studies  of  young  divines  in  training 
to  become  teachers  of  religious  truth  to  congre- 
gations or  to  pupils. 

II.  Prominent — perhaps  foremost — among 
the  subjects  which  the  young  divine  has  to  study 
with  minute  care,  is  the  constitution  of  the 
Greek  text  of  the  New  Testament.  Can  any- 
thing be  of  more  momentous  importance  to 
Christian  people  than  that  they  should  read  the 
words  of  our  divine  Saviour,  with  the  story  of 
His  life  and  actions  on  earth,  as  the  four  Evan- 
gelists recorded  them,  without  omission  of  any- 
thing genuine,  without  intrusion  of  anything 
spurious,  without  departure  from  the  very  forms 
of  language  in  which  they  wrote  ?  Is  it  not  of 
like  importance  that  we  should  read  the  Acts  of 
our  Lord's  Apostles  exactly  as  St.  Luke  has 
depicted  them  ?  that  we  should  learn  the  doc- 
trine of  some — Paul,  Peter,  James,  John,  and 
Jude — in  the  precise  words  they  used  when 
writing  their  epistles  to  Christian  churches,  or 


40  SERMON  II. 

to  Christian  people  generally  ?  or  can  we  have 
a  chance  of  interpreting  aright  the  darkly 
foretold  future  of  the  book  of  Revelation, 
unless  we  know  the  precise  terms  in  which  its 
prophetic  author  wrote  ? 

Thus  we  see  forced  upon  us  the  very  deli- 
cate and  disputable  question  of  the  genuine  text 
of  the  New  Testament.  With  this  question  all 
students,  all  translators,  all  revisers,  of  that 
sacred  volume  are  at  once  brought  face  to  face. 
Deal  with  it  they  must ;  and  they  ought  to  pray 
earnestly  and  strive  faithfully  that  they  may  be 
enabled  to  deal  with  it  wisely  and  well. 

You  all  know  that,  although  i, 880 years  and 
more  have  passed  away  since  our  Saviour's 
birth,  the  art  of  printing  books  is  not  yet  four 
centuries  and  a  half  old.  Before  the  middle  of 
the  fifteenth  century  all  books  were  in  manu> 
script,  written  by  the  human  hand  on  various 
materials,  as  parchment,  vellum,  or  paper.  The 
persons  employed  in  copying  books  of  this  kind, 
who,  in  pagan  times,  were  slaves  trained  for  the 
duty,  were  called  by  the  Greeks  '  grapheis '  or 
scribes,  by  the  Romans  '  librarii,'  book-men,  or 
book-makers.  In  Christian  times  the  copying 
of  books  was  chiefly  carried  on  by  monks  or 
others  employed  in  monasteries.     It  will  easily 


THE  REVISED   TEXT.  41 

be  supposed  that  such  scribes,  Hke  printers  who 
have  taken  their  place,  were  Hable  to  make 
mistakes  in  the  performance  of  their  work. 
And  these  errors  would  be  of  many  various 
kinds,  some  arisinsf  from  oversio^ht  or  careless- 
ness,  others  from  misjudgment.  Errors  of  the 
former  kind  are  such  as  misspelling  words,  mis- 
taking one*  word  for  another,  dropping  out 
words,  going  on  from  a  wTong  place  and  so 
omitting  something,  and  the  like.  Errors  of 
judgment  are  still  more  mischievous.  It  w^as  a 
frequent  practice  of  students,  old  as  well  as  young, 
to  write,  in  the  margin  of  a  manuscript  or  even 
within  it,  words  suggesting  changes  which  the 
writer  regarded  as  just  corrections  or  as  improve- 
ments ;  and  a  scribe  copying  such  a  manuscript 
might  adopt  any  such  change,  either  as  ap- 
proving it  honestly,  or  as  considering  himself 
bound  in  deference  to  keep  it.  Such  a  correc- 
tion was  called  '  glossema,'  a  gloss  ;  and  of  these 
glosses  there  are  numerous  examples  in  the 
manuscripts  of  the  New  Testament.  Changes 
of  this  kind  sometimes  arose  from  a  desire  to 
harmonise  one  place  of  Holy  Writ  with  another. 
Thus  passages  from  St.  Mark  or  St.  Luke  have 
been  intruded  into  St.  Matthew.  Sometimes 
commentators  have  been  tempted  to  introduce 


42  SERMON  IT. 

improvements  due  to  their  own  fancy.  Thus 
the  Authorised  Version  has  in  Matt.  v.  22, 
•  Whoever  is  angry  with  his  brother  without  a 
cause;'  but,  as  there  is  no  good  authority  for 
the  words  '  without  a  cause,'  the  revisers  have 
omitted  them.  In  Matt.  vi.  the  Authorised 
Version  gives  three  times  '  Thy  Father  which 
seeth  in  secret  shall  reward  thee  opaily.'  Again 
the  revisers  have  omitted  the  word  '  openly,' 
as  being  without  authority.  Differences  be- 
tween manuscripts  are  called  '  various  readings :' 
thus  in  Matt.  ii.  1 1  some  manuscripts  have 
'  they  found  the  child,'  but  others  of  greater 
weight  have  '  they  saw  the  child,'  as  in  our 
Bibles  ;  and  we  say  '  they  saw '  is  a  better  read- 
ing than  'they  found.'  In  Matt.  xi.  19  the 
Authorised  Version  gives  '  wisdom  is  justified 
of  her  children  ;'  but  the  revisers,  from  the  best 
manuscripts,  '  wisdom  is  justified  by  her  works  ;' 
and  we  had  no  doubt  that  the  error  was  that  of 
some  harmonising  critic  who  wished  to  assimi- 
late the  place  in  Matthew  to  that  in  Luke  vii.  2,5^ 
where  the  reading  is  *  of  her  children.'  But  I 
must  leave  this  part  of  my  subject  here. 

You  see,  then,  that  we  are  chiefly  depend- 
ent on  manuscripts  for  textual  criticism,  and 
it  stands  to  reason  that  the  oldest  are  on  many 


THE  REVISED    TEXT.  43 

grounds  the  most  trustworthy.  Until  the 
tenth  century,  the  characters  in  which  scribes 
wrote  were  what  we  now  call  capitals,  but  in 
textual  science  they  are  called  uncial  letters. 
About  the  tenth  century  began  a  style  of 
writing  in  small  letters,  like  our  handwriting  ; 
this  style  is  called  cursive.  And  thus  the 
extant  manuscripts  are  divided  into  uncial  and 
cursive.  Of  uncial  fewer  than  a  hundred  are 
known,  and  many  of  these  are  fragmentary. 
Of  cursive  nearly  one  thousand  are  extant. 
Those  which  comprise  the  whole  New  Testa- 
ment are  few  in  number  compared  with  those 
which  contain  only  particular  books  or  frag- 
ments. Uncial  manuscripts  are  distinguished 
from  cursive  by  capital  initial  letters.  The  two 
oldest  manuscripts,  both  of  the  uncial  class,  of 
course,  and  both  of  the  fourth  century,  are 
Codex  B  in  the  Vatican  Library  at  Rome,  and 
Codex  Sinaiticus,  called  Aleph,  brought  from 
the  East  in  1859  by  Tischendorf,  and  now  in 
the  Library  of  St.  Petersburg.  Next  to  these 
stand  the  Codex  Alexandrinus  (A),  in  the 
British  Museum  ;  Codex  Ephraemi  (C),  in  the 
National  Library  at  Paris  ;  and  Codex  Bezae  (D), 
in  the  University  Library  of  Cambridge.  Next 
to  codices,  the  most  important  authorities  for 


44  SERMON  II. 

the  constitution  of  the  text  are  the  ancient 
versions  of  the  New  Testament  in  various 
laneuao^es. 

We  find  also  some  assistance  in  the  pas- 
sages of  Scripture  cited  by  Christian  writers 
of  the  earhest  ages,  especially  by  those  who 
are  usually  called  Fathers  of  the  Church. 

Finally,  we  have  lectionaries  or  service- 
books  of  the  Greek  Church,  in  which  the 
portions  of  Scripture  publicly  read  throughout 
the  year  are  set  down  in  chronological  order, 
like  the  Epistles  and  Gospels  of  our  Prayer 
Book.  Some  of  these  are  uncial,  though  none 
perhaps  (says  Dr.  Scrivener)  older  than  the 
eighth  century. 

From  all  these  sources  useful  assistance  is 
obtainable  by  diligent  collation.  \_See  Professor 
E.  Abbott's  paper.  Appendix  II.] 

With  the  leading  rules  and  general  history  of 
textual  criticism  all  well-read  divines  are,  as  a 
matter  of  course,  more  or  less  familiar.  But 
few  can  be  deemed,  few  would  deem  them- 
selves, to  be  in  a  special  manner  masters  of 
the  subject,  and  authorities  concerning  it,  un- 
less they  had  acquired  a  practical  knowledge 
of  its  facts  and  niceties  by  the  exercise  of 
editorial  work.     Nor,  again,  would  those  scho- 


THE  REVISED   TEXT.  45 

lars  who  had  edited  certain  portions  of  the 
New  Testament  have  been  hkely  to  gain  so 
wide  and  so  intimate  a  knowledge  of  this  large 
criticism,  as  those  who  had  devoted  many  years 
of  life  to  the  formation  of  a  pure  text  of  the 
whole  collection.  In  the  revising  company 
there  were  several  eminent  divines  who  had 
ably  edited  various  portions  of  the  whole  ;  but 
three  only  (since  the  lamented  death  of  Dean 
Alford)  who  had  for  many  years  been  occupied 
with  the  constitution  of  the  entire  text ;  and  to 
these  three  we  naturally  and  justly  looked  for 
the  lar^e  and  definite  information  which  should 
guide  our  judgment  as  to  reception  or  rejection 
of  any  disputed  reading.  Of  these  divines  I  first 
mention  the  eldest,  Dr.  Scrivener,  to  whom,  for 
his  editions  of  the  text,  his  fac-simile  editions 
of  codices,  and  not  less  for  his  copious  '  Intro- 
duction to  the  Criticism  of  the  New  Testament,' 
Biblical  learning  owes  a  deep  debt  of  gratitude. 
The  two  others  were  the  Cambridge  Professors, 
Canon  Westcott  and  Dr.  Hort,  who  have  for 
more  than  twenty  years  been  jointly  engaged 
upon  a  new  edition  of  the  whole  text,  which 
is  now  published,  with  a  second  volume  con- 
taining the  valuable  Introduction  and  appendix 
explanatory    of   the    principles   and   procedure 


46  SERMON  11. 

adopted  by  these  excellent  scholars.  They 
kindly  handed  to  their  colleagues  their  text  of 
the  several  portions  as  our  work  went  on  ; 
and  the  assistance  thus  supplied  was  indeed 
invaluable.  Archdeacon  Palmer  has  printed 
at  the  Clarendon  Press  the  text  which  under- 
lies the  revised  version  ;  and  Dr.  Scrivener  at 
Cambridge  has  published  the  text  supposed 
to  have  been  adopted  by  the  translators  of 
1611.  If  capable  readers  compare  these  books 
by  the  light  of  the  learned  and  copious  volume 
which  I  have  before  cited,  Dr.  Scrivener's 
'  Introduction  '  (second  edition,  1874),  and  now 
of  their  own  second  volume  by  Westcott  and 
Hort,  they  will  understand  why  the  revision  of 
the  text  was  a  work  urgently  required  in  the 
interest  of  religious  truth.  In  the  first  place, 
the  translators  of  161 1  did  not  possess  one 
tithe  of  the  materials  of  Biblical  criticism  which 
are  now  accessible  to  scholars  and  divines. 
Especially  they  knew  nothing  of  those  two 
codices,  the  most  ancient  of  all,  which  avail  to 
enlighten  us  on  so  many  crucial  passages, 
Codex  B  and  Codex  Aleph.  In  the  next  place, 
the  knowledge  of  the  Greek  language  itself 
has  been  greatly  enlarged  and  improved  in 
this  country  since  the  reign  of  James  I. 


THE  REVISED   TEXT.  47 

In  these  books  young  students  have  a  body 
of  divinity  which,  If  dlHgentl}^  used,  will  enable 
them  to  form  a  correct  view  of  all  important 
textual  questions  affecting  the  New  Testament. 
We  found  it  very  advantageous  to  our  work  In 
the  Jerusalem  Chamber  that  the  three  divines 
whom  I  have  named  represented  two  some- 
what different  schools  of  feeling  on  that  subject. 
Dr.  Scrivener  was  evidently,  I  may  venture  to 
say  avowedly,  desirous  to  show  as  much  favour 
as  he  reasonably  could  to  the  readings  accepted 
in  161 1.  So  far  as  I  am  entitled  to  state  the 
Impression  derived  from  my  own  observation,  I 
think  the  judgment  of  Professors  Westcott  and 
Hort  was  generally  determined  by  the  prepon- 
derant concurrence  of  the  oldest  manuscripts, 
subject  to  such  control  as  peculiar  conditions 
might  exercise  In  a  few  excepted  cases.  On 
one  conclusion  all  three  critics  were  assuredly 
of  the  same  mind,  namelv,  that  the  value  of 
any  reading  Is  to  be  decided  by  the  weight,  not 
by  the  number,  of  the  documents  which  contain 
It.  The  agreement  of  three  of  the  oldest  uncial 
manuscripts  In  any  reading  might  outweigh  the 
appearance  of  a  different  reading  in  a  hundred 
cursives  ;  critical  skill  having  shown  that  these 
are    divisible   into    families,    each    traceable    to 


48  SERMON  11. 

some  common  original  devoid,  perhaps,  of 
ancient  authority. 

The  various  readings  of  the  Greek  New 
Testament  are,  as  might  be  expected,  very 
different  in  their  degree  of  importance.  Some 
of  them  may  be  said  to  have  no  importance  at 
all  in  point  of  sense.  Thus  it  can  make  no 
difference  whether  St.  Matthew  wrote  in  chap.  ii. 
that  the  wise  men  '  went  into  the  house  and 
found  the  child,'  or  '  went  into  the  house  and 
saw  the  child,'  though  the  latter  reading  has 
the  better  authority ;  but  whether  he  wrote 
in  chap.  i.  of  the  Virgin  Mary,  '  till  she  had 
brought  forth  her  firstborn  son,'  as  in  the 
Authorised  Version,  or  '  till  she  had  brought 
forth  a  son,'  as  in  the  revised  Testament, 
makes  some  small  difference,  because  it  is 
denied  by  many,  as  by  the  Church  of  Rome, 
that  the  mother  of  Jesus  ever  bore  a  second 
child. 

III.  Time  forbids  me  to  illustrate  my  subject 
by  citing  many  of  the  more  important  new  read- 
ings of  the  revised  Testament,  but  I  shall  con- 
elude  with  the  mention  of  four  places,  in  regard 
to  two  of  which  we  are  acknowledged  now  by 
all  reasonable  divines  to  be  certainly  right,  while 
the  two  others  are  disputed. 


THE   REVISED    TEXT.  49 

First :  the  7th  verse  of  the  fifth  chapter  In 
St.  John's  first  epistle  Is  thus  read  in  the 
Authorised  Version  :  *  For  there  are  three  that 
bear  record  in  heaven,  the  Father,  the  Word, 
and  the  Holy  Ghost  :  and  these  three  are  one.' 
But  all  that  follows  the  word  'record'  is  omitted 
by  the  revisers ;  and,  although  this  verse  was 
for  many  years  the  subject  of  voluminous  con- 
troversy. Dr.  Scrivener  says  with  truth  that 
*  to  maintain  the  genuineness  of  this  passage  is 
simply  impossible.' 

Second:  in  i  Tim.  ill.  16,  where  the  Autho- 
rised Version  has  '  God  was  manifest  in  the  flesh,' 
the  revisers  write,  'Who  was  manifest  in  the 
flesh.'  As  I  cannot  attempt  to  state  the  grounds 
of  criticism  in  a  sermon,  I  will  merely  say  that 
the  decision  of  the  revisers  has  been  antici- 
pated by  many  divines,  as  Griesbach,  Lach- 
mann,  Dean  Alford,  Bishop  Ellicott,  and  finally 
by  two  of  our  most  conservative  theologians, 
Bishop  Wordsworth  of  Lincoln,  and  Dr.  Scri- 
vener. 

Third:  Matt.  vi.  13.  All  our  previous 
Bibles  keep  the  doxology,  '  For  Thine  is  the 
kingdom,  and  the  power,  and  the  glory,  for  ever 
and  ever.  Amen.'  The  revisers  have  cast 
this    into   the  margin.     They  have  with  them 

E 


50  SERMON  II. 

Lachmann,  Tischendorf,  Tregelles,  Westcott, 
and  Hort;  but  here  they  cannot  count  Dr. 
Scrivener  among  their  supporters.  He  says, 
'  I  am  not  yet  absolutely  convinced  of  its 
spuriousness.'  And  at  the  close  of  his  discus- 
sion concerning  it,  he  expresses  his  opinion  that 
'  the  indictment  against  the  last  clause  of  the 
Lord's  Prayer  is  hitherto  unproven.'  He  says, 
however,  '  It  is  vain  to  dissemble  the  pressure 
of  the  adverse  case.'  Vain  indeed,  when  it  is  ab- 
sent from  the  four  earliest  extant  uncials,  Aleph, 
B,  D,  Z,  from  the  Latin  versions,  and  the  oldest 
Fathers  who  expound  the  Lord's  Prayer.  It 
seems  to  have  been  unknown  in  the  Western 
Church,  and  the  impression  left  on  my  own 
mind  by  consideration  of  all  the  evidence  is, 
that  the  doxology  is  not  a  part  of  the  Lord's 
Prayer  as  recorded  by  St.  Matthew,  but  that 
it  was  early  added  by  Eastern  churches  as  a 
good  conclusion  in  liturgies,  and  so  gradually 
found  its  way  into  Eastern  Greek  Testaments, 
and  thence  to  a  host  of  cursive  manuscripts. 
This  is  not  to  be  called  an  indictment  ao^ainst 
it,  for  it  is  a  very  good  doxology,  sound 
doctrine  taken  from  Chron.  xxix.  1 1 ,  12;  and, 
as  such,  it  may  be  retained  without  objec- 
tion in  our  Prayer  Book,  for  it  teaches  nothing 


THE  REVISED    TEXT.  51 

questionable,  and  was  brought  in  for  no  party 
purpose,  like  the  spurious  i  John  v.  7. 

Fourth  :  the  last  twelve  verses  in  St.  Mark's 
Gospel  (9-20)  are  exposed  to  a  suspicion  of  spu- 
riousness,  founded  on  strong  external  evidence, 
and,  as  some  think,  further  strengthened  by  their 
internal  character.  They  have  been  strenuously 
defended  by  Dean  Burgon  in  a  very  able  special 
treatise  ;  and  Dr.  Scrivener  concurs  with  him  in 
asserting  their  genuineness.  The  revisers  have 
not  expunged  them,  but  they  leave  a  break  after 
verse  9,  and  state  the  facts  concerning  this  pas- 
sage in  the  margin.  My  own  impression  hence 
derived  is,  that  the  verses  could  not  be  safely 
quoted  in  support  of  any  peculiar  doctrine,  seeing 
that  their  authority  can  always  be  disputed,  as 
being  doubtful. 

I  now  conclude  this  discourse  with  the 
prayer  which  Dr.  Scrivener  appends  to  his  in- 
structive volume  : 

*  God  grant  that,  if  these  studies  shall  have 
made  any  of  us  better  instructed  in  the  letter  of 
the  Holy  Word,  we  may  find  grace  to  grow,  in 
like  measure,  in  that  knowledge  which  tendeth 
to  salvation,  through  faith  in  His  mercy  by 
Christ  Jesus.'  ^ 

^  See  Appendix  II.  A. 


52 


SERMON    III. 

THE  REVISED    VERSION. 

St.  John's  Gospel  v.  39. 
Search  the  Scriptures. 

I.   So  we  read  in  the  Authorised  Version, 
but  wrongly ;  the  Revised  Version  writes  with 
just   correctness,    *  Ye   search    the    Scriptures.' 
This   is  manifestly  shown   to    be  right  by  the 
next  words,  '  because  ye  think  that  in  them  ye 
have   eternal    life.'     The  doctrine   of  a   future 
state  of  rewards  and  punishments  was  in  those 
times  taught  by  the  Pharisees  and  their  party, 
who  were  followed  as  orthodox  by  the  Jewish 
people    generally;    while    the    Sadducees,    who 
denied  this  doctrine,  were  a  smaller  sect.     The 
teachers  of  the  law  naturally  sought  support  for 
these  truths  in  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  and  they 
would  find  in  the  Psalms  and  elsewhere  texts 
adapted  to  their  purpose  ;  as  in  Job  xix.,  '  1  know 
that  my  Redeemer   liveth;'    and    in  Dan.  xii., 


THE   REVISED    VERSION.  53 

'  Many  of  them  that  sleep  In  the  dust  of  the 
earth  shall  awake,  some  to  everlasting  life,  and 
some  to  shame  and  everlasting  contempt.'  To 
prove  this  favourite  doctrine,  says  our  Lord  to 
the  Jews,  'ye  search  the  Scriptures:'  then  He 
continues,  '  and  these  are  they  that  bear  wit- 
ness of  Me.  And  ye  will  not  come  to  Me,  that 
ye  may  have  life.*  His  argument  Is,  '  Although 
ye  Jews  search  your  own  Scriptures  diligently, 
to  find  in  them  proofs  of  a  futur-e  state  of  life 
eternal,  yet  ye  do  not  find  in  them,  because  ye 
do  not  search  diligently  and  faithfully,  those 
many  texts  which  bear  witness  of  Me,  that  I 
am  the  Christ,  the  Son  of  God,  your  expected 
Messiah  ;  and  therefore  ye  do  not  come  to  Me 
that  ye  may  have  what  ye  so  much  desire — 
llfe^llfe  eternal :  ye  do  not  come  to  Me,  who 
am  Indeed  the  way,  the  truth,  and  the  life.' 

Thus  the  verb  '  search '  in  this  place  is  not 
imperative,  but  Indicative,  '  Ye  search  :'  and  it  Is 
probable  that  the  translators  of  161 1  chose  the 
wrong  form  because  It  gave  a  useful  weapon 
against  the  practice  of  the  Church  of  Rome  so 
far  as  this  was  supposed  to  forbid  or  condemn 
the  study  of  Holy  Scripture  by  the  laity.  There 
Is,  however,  no  lack  of  texts  In  our  Bible  show- 
ing that  our  Lord  and  His  apostles  did  recom- 


54  SERMON  III. 

mend  to  all,  by  precept  as  well  as  by  example, 
the  diligent  study  of  God's  written  Word. 

II.  In  my  second  sermion  the  correction  of 
the  Greek  text  was  the  topic  specially  con- 
sidered. The  necessity  of  this  work  was  great 
and  urofent.  At  the  same  time  with  the  Revised 
Version  appeared  two  most  important  books. 
At  Oxford  was  published  the  Greek  text  re- 
cognised and  adopted  by  the  revising  company, 
at  the  foot  of  which  are  shown  the  readings 
apparently  received  by  the  translators  of  1611, 
but  rejected  by  the  revisers.  Conversely,  at 
Cambridge  was  published  the  Greek  text  sup- 
posed to  have  been  accepted  by  the  companies 
of  1 6 1 1 ,  while  at  the  foot  are  shown  the  correc- 
tion s  of  that  text  accepted  by  the  revisers,  and 
also  those  preferred  by  some  in  the  revised  mar- 
gin. The  variations  between  the  (supposed)  text 
of  161 1  and  that  of  1 881,  as  recorded  in  these 
books,  exceed  five  thousand  in  number.  But 
many  of  these  changes  do  not  affect  the  Eng- 
lish translation  at  all,  and  many  others,  which 
do  affect  it,  while  in  a  greater  or  less  degree 
they  vary  the  form  of  language,  leave  the  real 
sense  of  the  passage  unimpaired.  Hence  it 
must  be  observed  that  the  gravely  important 
varieties  of  text,  though  by  no  means  incon- 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  55 

siderabie,  are  but  a  moderate  fraction  of  the 
total  number  recorded  in  the  volumes  edited  by 
Archdeacon  Palmer  and  Dr.  Scrivener  respec- 
tively. 

At  this  point  I  will  cite  the  paragraph  in 
the  preface  to  the  Revised  Version  which  deals 
with  the  question  of  text. 

'With  regard  to  the  Greek  text,  it  would 
appear  that,  if  to  some  extent  the  translators 
exercised  an  independent  judgment,  it  was 
mainly  in  choosing  amongst  readings  contained 
in  the  principal  editions  of  the  Greek  text  that 
had  appeared  in  the  sixteenth  century.  Wher- 
ever they  seem  to  have  followed  a  reading 
which  is  not  found  in  any  of  those  editions, 
their  rendering  may  probably  be  traced  to  the 
Latin  Vulgate.  Their  chief  guides  appear  to 
have  been  the  later  editions  of  Stephanus  and 
of  Beza,  and  also,  to  a  certain  extent,  the  Com- 
plutensian  Polyglot.  All  these  were  founded 
for  the  most  part  on  manuscripts  of  late  date, 
few  in  number,  and  used  with  little  critical 
skill.  But  in  those  days  it  could  hardly  have 
been  otherwise.  Nearly  all  the  more  ancient 
of  the  documentary  authorities  have  become 
known  only  within  the  last  two  centuries  ;  some 
of  the  most  important  of  them,  indeed,  within 


56  SERMON  Iir, 

the  last  few  years.  Their  publication  has  called 
forth  not  only  improved  editions  of  the  Greek 
text,  but  a  succession  of  instructive  discussions 
on  the  variations  which  have  been  brought  to 
light,  and  on  the  best  modes  of  distinguishing 
oricfinal  readines  from  chang^es  introduced  in 
the  course  of  transcription.  While,  therefore, 
it  has  long  been  the  opinion  of  all  scholars  that 
the  commonly  received  text  needed  thorough 
revision,  it  is  but  recently  that  materials  have 
been  acquired  for  executing  such  a  work  with 
even  approximate  completeness.' 

This  passage  refers  to  the  textual  question 
in  a  general  and  cursory  manner  only.  It  was 
beyond  the  scope  of  a  preface  to  do  more  than 
this  ;  any  detailed  account  would  have  required 
a  volume  such  as  Dr.  Scrivener's  'Introduction,' 
noticed  in  a  former  sermon  :  or  such  as  that 
second  appendix  now  gained  from  the  labours  of 
Canon  Weslcott  and  Dr.  Hort,  besides  which 
appendix,  the  pages  (541-562)  subjoined  to 
their  first  volume  deserve  the  studious  atten- 
tion of  all  theologians,  clerical  or  lay,  form- 
ing as  they  do  a  comprehensive  outline  of  facts 
and  principles  applicable  to  the  textual  criticism 
and  constitution  of  the  New  Testament. 

Leaving  now  the  question  of  the  Greek  text, 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  57 

I  propose  In  this  discourse  to  speak  of  variant 
English  renderings  In  places  where  the  original 
is  either  undisputed,  or  only  partially  ques- 
tioned. But  in  so  vast  a  field  as  this  it  is 
evident  that  my  exemplification  must  be 
limited  to  a  few  instances  of  peculiar  interest 
and  importance. 

Here,  again,  it  suits  my  purpose  to  cite  the 
modest  language  of  the  preface  to  the  Revised 
Version. 

'We  know  full  well  that  defects  must  have 
their  place  in  a  work  so  long  and  so  arduous  as 
this  which  has  now  come  to  an  end.  Blemishes 
and  imperfections  there  are  in  the  noble  transla- 
tion which  we  have  been  called  upon  to  revise  ; 
blemishes  and  imperfections  will  assuredly  be 
found  in  our  own  revision.  All  endeavours  to 
translate  the  Holy  Scriptures  into  another 
tongue  must  fall  short  of  their  aim,  when  the 
obligation  is  imposed  of  producing  a  version 
that  shall  be  alike  literal  and  idiomatic,  faithful 
to  each  thought  of  the  original,  and  yet,  in  the 
expression  of  it,  harmonious  and  free.  While 
we  dare  to  hope  that  in  places  not  a  few  of 
the  New  Testament  the  introduction  of  slight 
changes  has  cast  a  new  light  upon  much  that 
was  difficult  and  obscure,  we  cannot  forget  how 


58  SERMON  III. 

often  we  have  failed  in  expressing  some  finer 
shade  of  meaning  which  we  recoo^nised  in  the 
original,  how  often  idiom  has  stood  in  the  way 
of  a  perfect  rendering,  and  how  often  the 
attempt  to  preserve  a  familiar  form  of  words, 
or  even  a  familiar  cadence,  has  only  added 
another  perplexity  to  those  which  already 
beset  us.' 

Yes,  the  existence  of  blemishes  in  the  re- 
vised volume,  thus  acknowledged  by  the  col- 
lective voice  of  the  company,  would  certainly 
not  be  denied  by  any  individual  member ;  yet  if 
.  we  were  severally  required  to  furnish  lists  of 
what  we  regard  as  blemishes,  it  is  more  than 
probable  that  no  two  lists  would  exactly  coincide. 
Some  would,  perhaps,  allow  that  the  lan- 
guage of  the  Authorised  Version  has  occasion- 
ally been  altered  without  adequate  reason,  and 
with  no  real  improvement;  as  when  we  write, 
'  Thy  will  be  done,  as  in  heaven,  so  on  earth,' 
for  the  usual  rendering,  '  Thy  will  be  done  in 
earth,  as  it  is  in  heaven.'  Others  would  endorse 
a  complaint  very  commonly  made,  that  the 
Greek  connective  particles  are  too  scrupulously 
represented  in  our  translation,  to  the  detriment 
of  English  idiom  as  well  as  of  melodious 
rhythm.     They   might    note    many    examples 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  59 

illustrating  this  opinion  in  the  Synoptic  Gospf^ls  ; 
for  instance,  in  chapters  viii.,  ix.,  xiii.,  xiv.  of 
St.  Matthew.  The  American  critics  would  find 
in  the  minority  of  the  company  support  for  some 
of  their  views,  as  printed  at  the  close  of  the 
Revised  Version.  But  in  these  cases,  and  in 
others  which  could  be  suggested,  it  may  be  that 
the  decision  of  the  majority,  for  which  strong 
reasons  were  always  urged,  was  wiser  than  the 
judgment  of  those  who  voted  in  a  contrary 
sense ;  and  if  it  were  not  always  so,  yet  a  few 
such  errors  or  shortcomings  are  not  a  feather  in 
the  scale  when  weighed  against  the  vast  im- 
provements wrought  in  the  textual  constitution 
of  the  Greek,  and  the  verbal  expression  of  the 
English  New  Testament,  by  the  labours  now 
brought  to  a  conclusion,  which  I  would  fain 
hope  is  not  unalterably  permanent. 

But  I  must  digress  no  further  from  the 
special  subject  of  this  day's  consideration — the 
English  renderings  of  undisputed  Greek  words. 

III.  One  new  rendering  in  the  revision  has 
been  received  with  general  but  not  universal 
favour.  I  allude  to  the  well-known  passage.  Acts 
xxvi.  28,  which  in  the  Authorised  Version  is, 
'  Then  Agrippa  said  unto  Paul,  Almost  thou  per- 
suadest  me  to  be  a  Christian.'    We  have  a  ques- 


6o  SERMON  ///. 

tloij  of  reading-  here  as  well  as  of  interpretation. 
The  translators  of  i6i  i  found  a  verb  which  they 
render  '  to  be,'  though  they  ought  to  have  written 
it  *  to  become '  a  Christian.  But  the  revisers,  from 
the  three  oldest  uncials,  and  several  versions, 
have  received  a  different  verb,  '  to  make,'  and 
they  write  the  words,  '  with  but  little  persuasion 
thou  wouldst  fain  make  me  a  Christian.'  This 
is  a  good  rendering,  and  assuredly  a  true  one. 
Literally  the  words  are,  *  in  a  little  thou  usest 
persuasion  to  make  me  a  Christian.'  The 
idiomatic  phrase  '  in  a  little  '  may  imply  '  space 
of  time '  or  '  number  of  words,'  which  amount  to 
the  same  thing  here  ;  and  king  Agrippa  in  effect 
says,  *  You  are  such  an  enthusiast,  O  Paul,  that 
you  think  it  will  take  little  time  and  few  words  to 
make  me  a  Christian.*  Yet  this  excellent  inter- 
pretation is  said  to  be  contested  by  no  less  a 
person  than  Dr.  Ryle,  Bishop  of  Liverpool.  His 
words,  reported  in  Pztblic  Opinion  by  a  hearer 
of  his  sermon,  are  the  following  : — "  I  hold  with 
Luther,  Beza,  Grotius,  Poole,  Bengel,  and  Stier, 
that  the  translation  given  in  our  Authorised 
Version  is  right  and  correct.  I  am  fortified  in  my 
belief  by  the  fact  that  this  is  the  view  of  one  who 
thought  and  spoke  and  wrote  in  the  language  of 
the  New  Testament ;  I  mean  the  famous  Greek 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  6i 

Father  Chrysostom.  And  last,  but  not  least, 
no  other  view  appears  to  me  to  harmonise  with 
the  exclamation  of  the  apostle  St.  Paul  in  the 
verse  which  follows  :  '  Almost,'  he  seems  to  say, 
taking  up  Agrippa's  words ;  '  I  want  thee  to  be 
not  almost,  but  altogether  a  Christian." — Now, 
without  weighing  opinion  against  opinion  (though 
I  could  cite  crowds  of  eminent  scholars  and 
divines  who  differ  from  the  Bishop  and  those 
whom  he  cites),  I  must  declare  my  entire  con- 
viction that  the  authorised  rendering  is  unten- 
able on  every  ground  which  can  be  specified  : 
first,  because  the  true  reading  is  ^  to  make,'  not 
'  to  be'  or  '  to  become \  secondly,  because  '  almost' 
is  an  incorrect  rendering  of  the  Greek  phrase ; 
thirdly,  because  the  verb  does  not  in  good 
Greek  prose  mean  'thou  persuadest'  in  the 
Bishops  sense,  but  '  thou-art-using-persuasion  ;' 
fourthly,  because  '  Christianos,'  a  Christian,  was 
at  that  time  a  term  of  opprobrium  or  contempt  ; 
and  St.  Paul  does  not  say  in  his  reply,  '  I  wish 
thou  and  all  who  hear  me  this  day  might  be- 
come Christians,'  but  '  I  wish  ye  might  become 
such  as  J  am,  except  these  bonds.'  Agrippa 
uses  the  sneering  appellation  '  Christianon.' 
Paul  does  not  embrace  it  as  a  glorious  name  ; 
no,    he    only    says    'such    as    I   am,'   with    the 


62  SERMON  III. 

courteous  exception  of  his  chains.  Neither 
Paul  nor  any  of  the  apostles  ever  call  them- 
selves Christians.  St.  Luke  tells  us  that  the 
disciples  were  first  so  called  at  Antloch  ;  yes,  so 
called  they  were  in  contemptuous  reproach. 
Hence  St.  Peter  says  In  his  first  epistle,  Iv.  i6, 
'  If  a  man  suffer  as  a  Christian,  let  him  not  be 
ashamed,  but  let  him  glorify  God  in  this  name! 
Even  so  the  Christians  of  the  Reformation  350 
years  ago  were  contemptuously  called  Pro- 
testants on  account  of  the  protest  made  against 
an  edict  of  the  Diet  of  Speier  ;  but  the  martyrs 
of  Mary's  reign  in  England  were  not  ashamed  to 
suffer  under  the  name  of  Protestants,  protesting, 
as  they  deemed,  against  false  doctrine  and  mis- 
chievous superstition. 

While,  however,  I  am  sure  that  the  '  almost 
and  altogether'  of  the  Authorised  Version  Is 
totally  wrong,  I  am  not  quite  satisfied  with  the 
revised  rendering  of  verse  29.  I  regret  that  the 
'  would  to  God  '  of  the  Authorised  Version  has 
been  kept.  I  believe  (with  Webster  and  Wilkin- 
son) the  right  translation  to  be  this  :  '  I  would 
pray  to  God,  whether  with  little  prayer  or  with 
much,  that  not  thou  only,  but  also  all  that  hear 
me  this  day,  might  become  such  as  I  am,  except 
these  bonds.' 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  63 

When  Bishop  Ryle  has  reconsidered  the 
authoritative  reading,  and  the  just  sense  of  the 
several  words,  I  venture  to  beheve  that  he  will 
abandon  the  old  error  here. 

IV.  The  revisers  are  blamed,  to  my  great 
surprise,  by  some  high  authorities,  such  as  the 
Times  and  the  Edinbui^gh  Review,  because 
in  I  Cor.  xiil.,  and  everywhere  else,  they 
have  (with  Tyndale)  rendered  the  Greek  word 

*  agape'  by  the  English  'love,'  Instead  of  retain- 
ing the  word  'charity,'  which  the  translators 
of  1 6 1 1  unhappily  imported  from  the  '  caritas  ' 
of  Jerome's  Latin  version,  known  as  the  Vul- 
gate, or  perhaps  from  its  daughter,  the  Rhemlsh 
version.  I  venture  to  affirm  that,  as  scholars, 
having  a  just  regard  for  the  proprieties  of  lan- 
guage, it  was  impossible  for  us  to  adopt  any 
other  rendering  than  love  (to  love),  as  Luther 
and  other  German  translators  have  '  Hebe  * 
(lieben),  and  nothing  else.  I  must  put  the 
question  before  you  with  some  fulness  of 
detail. 

The  Greek  language  has  various  words 
meaning  Tove'  and  'to  love.'  '  Phllos '  is  'a 
friend;'  'fhilein,'    to    love    in  a   friendly  way; 

*  philia,'  friendship.  '  Storge '  is  a  word  of 
somewhat    rare    use,    the    love  of   kin,   mainly 


64  SERMON  III. 

that  of  parents  for  their  offspring  ;  the  verb 
beino-  '  stereein.'  '  Eros,'  with  Its  verb  '  eran,' 
expresses  love  as  a  passion,  not  only  sexually, 
but  in  all  metaphors  of  an  analogous  nature, 
as  love  of  pleasure,  love  of  money,  love  of 
power,  and  the  like.  Lastly,  we  have  the 
beautiful  noun  '  agape,'  with  its  verb  '  agapan,' 
which  may  be  used,  and  is  in  Scripture  used, 
for  all  or  any  of  these  feelings  when  they  are 
pure  and  lovely  and  of  good  report.  Let  me 
exemplify  Its  use  in  a  few  texts: — (i)  As  to 
earthly  feeling  and  conduct :  Eph.  v.  25,  '  Hus- 
bands, love  your  wives,'  with  all  that  follows. 
Love  of  our  brother,  love  of  the  saints,  are 
ao-ain  and  aeain  so  recommended.  Gal.  v.  13, 
'  By  love  serve  one  another.'  But  need  I  do 
more  than  read  to  you  that  passage  of  St.  Paul, 
Rom.  xiil.  8,  Q,  10  ? — '  Owe  no  man  any  thing,  but 
to  love  one  another  :  for  he  that  loveth  his 
neighbour  hath  fulfilled  the  law.  Every  com- 
mandment Is  summed  up  In  this  word, 
namely,  Thou  shalt  love  thy  neighbour  as  thy- 
self. Love  worketh  no  ill  to  his  neighbour  : 
love  therefore  is  the  fulfilment  of  the  law.' 
Such  is  agapan,  such  is  agape,  between  man 
and  man.  What  need  we  else  ?  Why  import 
the  Latin   'caritas,'   charity,    to    supersede    the 


THE   REVISED    VERSION.  65 

sweet  Teutonic  word  'Hebe'  (love)  in  i  Cor.  xlil., 
and  a  few  other  places,  as  our  former  translators 
have  unfortunately  done  ?  (2)  But  the  use  of 
these  excellent  words  in  Scripture  is  not  con- 
fined to  earthly  relations.  They  are  used  In 
Holy  Writ  to  express  what  the  Divine  Being 
feels  towards  His  rational  creatures,  what  His 
rational  creatures  ought  to  feel  towards  Him. 
The  love  of  God,  the  love  of  Christ,  are  set 
forth  in  both  senses,  as  "our  duty  and  as  our 
blessing;  and  the  whole  is  crowned  by  the 
wondrously  thrilling,  the  deeply  comforting 
assurance  of  the  beloved  disciple  St.  John,  that 
'  God  is  love.'  And  all  this  is  declared  to  us 
by  the  word  agape. 

It  remains  to  ask  how  it  was  that  Jerome 
thought  proper  to  render  that  word  by  'caritas,' 
and  why  (if  indeed  we  can  find  any  reason)  our 
own  translators  adopted  it  partially  in  the  form 
'charity.'  Jerome's  reason  is  perhaps  not  far 
to  seek.  For  '  love '  the  Latin  language  has 
but  one  comprehensive  word,  'amor;'  its  verb 
being  '  amare,'  to  love.  But  there  is  a  second 
verb,  'diligere,'  properly  meaning  to  choose, 
but  also  used  in  the  sense  which  we  often  express 
by  the  word  'liking,'  or  even  mildly  '  loving ;' 
and    from    this    verb    a   noun   was  coined  and 

F 


66  SERMON  III. 

sometimes  used  in  later  Latin,  'dilectio/  whence 
we  get  the  word  'predilection.' 

The  words  'amor,'  'amare,'  are  used  to  ex- 
press all  kinds  of  earthly  love,  good  or  not.  Divine 
love  in  any  pure  and  lofty  sense  was  not  known 
to  the  heathen  world  in  general,  only  perhaps 
to  a  few  philosophers.  Owing  to  the  frequent 
abuse  of  those  words  by  some  licentious  Latin 
writers,  Jerome  was,  we  think,  unwilling  to 
apply  them  to  the  pure  and  virtuous  love  of 
Christian  brethren,  or  to  the  high  and  holy 
love  which  links  the  creature  with  the  Creator, 
the  redeemed  with  the  Redeemer.  Hence  he 
adopted  instead  of  'amor'  another  classical  word, 
distorting  its  sense,  and  applying  it  too  largely. 
I  mean  the  word  'caritas.'  You  know  that 
'carus'  (Ital.  caro,  French  cher)  means  in  Eng- 
lish 'dear,'  and  its  substantive  'caritas'  means 
therefore  '  dearness,'  and  has  properly  an  objec- 
tive sense  only,  that  character  or  quality  which 
causes  some  person  or  thing  to  be  dear.  Thus 
a  Roman  would  say,  '  My  country  attaches  me  to 
itself  by  a  strong  dearness  ; '  or  two  friends  might 
be  said  to  be  united  by  a  mutual  dearness,  and 
the  like.  This  noun,  I  say,  Jerome,  avoiding 
'amor,'  thought  proper  to  misuse  by  adopting  it 
in  all  the  senses,  subjective  and  objective,  which 


THE  REVISED    VERSION,  67 

'amor'  can  assume.  He  has  therefore  used  it 
throughout  the  whole  of  his  Latin  translation 
(the  Vulgate),  even  in  St.  John's  epistles  and 
other  places,  where  the  love  of  God  and  of 
Christ  are  set  forth.  He  has  not  shrunk  even 
from  writing  '  Deus  est  caritas/  God  is  carity 
(charity). 

But  what  was  he  to  do  for  a  verb  ?  If  he 
used  'caritas,'  dearness,  for  'amor,'  love,  he  could 
not  say  *  caritare  to  charity,'  for  '  amare  to  love,' 
seeing  that  'caritas'  is  objective  in  its  proper  use, 
and  has  no  verb  of  its  own.  What  then  did 
Jerome  do  ?  He  took  the  lukewarm  word 
'diligere,'  'to  choose  with  a  liking,'  'to  like,'  and 
so  '  to  love.'  And  this  verb  he  has  used  for 
'amare'  in  almost  all  the  places  where  the  Greek 
hasagapan.  Fancy  '  Love  thy  neighbour  as  thy- 
self in  this  shape,  '  Choose  thy  neighbour  with 
a  liking  as  thou  choosest  thyself;'  or,  for  '  Christ 
loved  us,'  'Christ  chose  us  with  a  liking,'  and 
gave  Himself  for  us!  At  such  disadvantage  has 
Jerome  placed  the  whole  theory  and  practice  of 
holy  Christian  love  in  his  Latin  version  of  the 
New  Testament.  Meaning,  no  doubt,  to  do 
right,  he  did  wrong  ;  meaning  to  do  good,  he 
did  harm.  And  why,  again  and  again  I  ask, 
why    did    the    translators    of     161 1     adopt    his 

F  2 


68  SERMON  III. 

degenerate  word  'caritas'  In  i  Cor.  xiii.,  and  in 
some  twenty  other  places  which  Cruden's  '  Con- 
cordance '  will  show  you,  when  they  shrank 
from  adopting  It  throughout  the  first  two 
Epistles  of  St.  John,  and  In  some  seventy 
places  besides,  and  when  they  have  rendered 
agapan  by  the  English  verb  'to  love'  every- 
where? Here  they  were  hampered.  They  had 
no  such  refuge  as  Jerome's  'dlllgere,'  poor  as 
that  Is  ;  'to  like'  was  Impossible  ;  the  beautiful 
word  'lleben,'  to  love,  stood  alone,  they  could 
not  do  other  than  take  It.  Why  then  their 
'charity'?  I  cannot  be  sure.  I  can  only  guess. 
I  Imagine  that  In  i  Cor.  xill.  they  wished  for 
a  noun  which  should  be  free  from  any  tinge 
or  suspicion  of  passionateness,  and  so  they  laid 
hold  on  Jerome's  'caritas,'  which  the  Rhemish 
version  would  give  as  'charity,'  and  sprinkled 
the  same  word  here  and  there  'charily'  to  give 
it  more  vogue.  Their  motive  we  may  not 
doubt  was  good,  but  their  reasoning  and  their 
conclusion  were  bad,  and  the  revisers  of 
1 88 1  could  not  possibly  avoid  reversing  their 
decision. 

But  some  will  say,  with  counter-protest,  the 
Authorised  Version  has  given  to  this  word 
'  charity'  a  home  In  our  language,  and  we  cannot 


THE   REVISED    VERSION.  69 

do  without  it  :  is  it  to  disappear  from  our  Bibles  ? 
is  its  very  foundation  to  be  removed  ?  are  we  to 
lose  it  ?  To  this  last  question  I  answer  at  once, 
No.     The  English  language  has  got  the  word 

*  charity,'  and  that  word    it  wall   keep,   though 

*  love '  be  read  in  i  Cor.  xiii.  The  revisers 
as  little  had  the  will  as  they  had  the  powder  to 
expunge  a  word  from  our  dictionaries,  to  deny 
it  a  place  in  our  literature,  to  forbid  its  use  in 
daily  conversation.  The  word  'charity'  has 
nothing  to  fear  from  ceasing  to  stand  In  the 
epistles  of  Scripture.  But,  let  me  ask,  has 
English  usage  preserved  that  high  ideal  of 
Christian  love  of  one's  neighbour  which  St. 
Paul  depicts  in  that  beautiful  chapter  ?  Surely 
not.  Charity,  in  common  parlance,  has  these 
meanings  :  (i)  beneficence,  a  beneficent  act,  or  a 
beneficent  institution ;  (2)  that  disposition  or 
principle  of  thought  and  conduct  which  leads  us 
to  think  and  speak  as  little  evil  and  as  much  good 
of  others  as  we  possibly  can.  And  the  epithet 
'  charitable  '  we  apply  in  these  senses  :  (1)  bene- 
ficent, (2)  putting  the  best  construction  on 
the  acts  and  characters  of  others.  But  do 
these  definitions  exhaust  St.  Paul's  description 
of  Christian  'agape'?  No.  Beneficence  is 
expressly  distinguished  from  '  agape '  in  v.  3  : 


70  SERMON  III. 

Bestowing  goods  profiteth  nothing  without 
love.  And  yet  I  venture  to  say  that  the  word 
'  charity  '  is  used  more  than  twenty  times  by 
English  folk  and  in  English  writings  as  re- 
ferring to  beneficence,  for  once  that  it  is  used  in 
that  second  signification,  which  comes  nearer  to 
the  picture  of  love,  as  *  being  kind,'  as  taking  no 
account  of  evil,  as  '  rejoicing  not  in  unrighteous- 
ness,* as  *  believing  all  things,  hoping  all  things.' 
Yet  even  these  features  do  not  complete  the  por- 
trait of  Christian  '  agape.'  Finally,  then,  I  re- 
peat, that  the  revisers  have  most  assuredly  done 
right  in  replacing  everywhere  (for  '  agape ')  the 
Latin  word  '  charity '  by  that  Saxon  word  '  love,' 
which  the  Authorised  Version  itself  uses  in 
seventy  passages  instead  of  Jerome's  word  ; 
while  the  cognate  verb  '  to  love,'  in  that  version 
as  well  as  in  the  revised,  is  employed  through- 
out the  New  Testament.  Against  these  facts, 
and  the  conclusion  to  which  they  point,  can  any 
weighty  argument  be  found  ? 

V.  There  is,  I  suppose,  no  feature  in  the  Re- 
vised Version  which  has  been  more  assailed  by 
the  outside  world  than  its  mode  of  dealing  with 
the  Lord's  Prayer.  I  must  therefore  not 
conclude  this  sermon  without  endeavouring  to 
quiet  any  alarm  you  may  have  felt  respecting  it. 


THE   REVISED    VERSION.  ji 

The  prayer  as  read  in  the  eleventh  chapter 
of  St.  Luke,  1-4,  Is,  by  the  authority  of  manu- 
scripts, reduced  to  the  following  words  : 

'  Father,  hallowed  be  Thy  name.  Thy 
kingdom  come.  Give  us  day  by  day  our  daily 
bread.  And  forgive  us  our  sins  ;  for  we  our- 
selves also  forgive  every  one  that  is  indebted  to 
us.     And  bring  us  not  into  temptation.' 

In  St.  Matthew  vi.  9-13  the  revisers  depart 
from  the  Authorised  by  writing, — 

( i)   *  Thy  will  be  done,  as  in  heaven,  so  on 
earth.' 

To  many  this  inversion,  though  literal,  seems 
unnecessary, 

(2)  'Have    forgiven'    in    the    place    of 

'  forgive.' 
^  This  is  required  by  a  new  reading. 

(3)  '  And  bring  us  not  into  temptation.' 
This  change  is  right,  because  the  Greek  in 

both  Gospels  means  '  bring,'  and  because  '  lead  ' 
is  an  over-strong  and  painful  word  drawn  from 
the  Vulgate,  and  used  there  for  the  reason  that 
Latin  has  no  verb  which  adequately  represents 
'  bring '  in  the  sense  required  here. 

(4)  '  But  deliver  us  from  the  evil  one.' 
The    revisers   are,    as    might   be    expected, 

severely   censured   for   writing  'the  evil  one,' 


72  SERMON  III. 

where  the  Greek  would  equally  well  bear  the 
Authorised  rendering  'evil.'  Let  me  say  that 
the  majority  who  voted  this  change  included 
excellent  scholars  and  divines  of  high  repute. 
Their  arguments  were  exceedingly  strong,  and 
not  easy  to  confute.  But  a  minority  still  doubt 
whether  the  alteration  is  worth  keeping  in 
the  face  of  wide  dissatisfaction,  and  whether 
the  protest  of  a  margin  ought  not  to  content 
those  who  strongly  believe  in  the  concrete  sense 
of  the  Greek  term  used  by  our  Lord  here.^ 

Remember  this  one  thing,  my  Christian 
brethren,  that,  if  the  Revised  Testament  were 
authorised  for  public  use  at  once,  it  would  not 
follow  that  any  change  need  be  made  in  the 
Lord's  Prayer  as  it  now  stands  in  our  Common 
Prayer  Book  and  in  the  Church  Catechism. 
For  at  the  present  time  the  forms  used  in  our 

^  In  Public  Opinion  I  find  a  provincial  journalist  cited  as 
saying  that  in  future  times  the  revisers  of  1881  will  be  known 
as  those  who  introduced  the  devil  into  the  Lord's  Prayer.  I 
would  invite  his  attention  to  Matt.  iv.  i-ii  ;  xiii.  19,  38,  39; 
Luke  X.  17,  18;  Acts  xxvi.  15-18;  i  John  iii.  8;  v.  18,  19.  In 
the  same  Public  Opinion  I  read,  in  a  letter  of  Mr.  Dykes  :  '  Of 
the  many  beauties  of  the  Revised  Version  I  reckon  none  more 
acceptable  than  the  changed  ending  of  Matt.  vi.  13,  having  long 
sympathised  with  the  complaint  of  good  John  Berridge  of 
Everton,  in  his  '  Christian  World  Unmasked,'  that  whereas  the 
devil's  name  was  originally  in  the  Lord's  Prayer,  '  some  roguish 
body '  had  wiped  it  out. 


THE  REVISED    VERSION.  73 

Church  Services  do  not  exactly  agree  with 
those  which  appear  in  the  Authorised  Versions 
of  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Luke.  We  do  not  say 
'  foreive  us  our  debts  '  with  St.  Matthew,  nor 
'  forgive    us    our    sins '   with    St.    Luke.     And 

o 

we  may  still  repeat  the  ascription  of  glory  at 
the  close,  even  though  we  deem  it  to  have 
been  added  with  the  best  intentions  by  pious 
Eastern  bishops. 

These  considerations  should  set  every  mind 
at  ease  about  this  cherished  form  of  prayer,  and 
assist  us  now  in  ascribing  to  God,  the  Father,  Son, 
and  Holy  Spirit,  '  the  kingdom  and  the  power 
and  the  glory  for  ever  and  ever.     Amen.'  ^ 

1  Appendix  III.  shows  all  the  places  of  real  importance  in 
which  the  Revised  Version  differs  from  the  Authorised. 


APPENDICES. 


APPENDIX    I. 

I  THINK  it  right  to  append  a  few  words  in  defence 
of  some  interpretations  of  passages  in  the  New  Tes- 
tament as  adopted  in  Sermon  I. 

I.  I  Cor.  ii.  13,  irvsvfiaTiKCL  irvevfiaTLKols  crv^- 
KpivovTBs.  Here  the  Authorised  Version  renders 
*  comparing  spiritual  things  with  spiritual ; '  and  this 
is  kept  in  the  Revised  Version.  I  have  declared  my 
conviction  that  the  competing  translation, '  explaining 
spiritual  things  to  spiritual  men,'  which  stands  in  our 
margin,  is  the  right  one.  Biblical  scholars  do  not 
deny  that  the  verb  o-vyKplvco  can  have  this  sense  in 
Hellenistic  Greek,  though  the  usage  is  not  classical. 
In  my  view,  explained  by  my  paraphrase,  the  logic 
of  the  whole  context  demands  that  irvsviiaTtKols 
should  be  taken  as  masculine  (to  spiritual  men),  not  as 
neuter  (spiritual  things),  (i)  St.  Paul  immediately  goes 
on  to  say  :  '  The  psychic  [i.e.  the  merely  intellectual] 
man  cannot  receive  spiritual  things,  but  the  spiritual 
man  judgeth  all  things,  and  he  is  not  subject  to  the 
judgment  of  the  psychic  man.  But  to  you  Corin- 
thians, unhappily,  I  could  not  speak  as  to  spiritual 
men,  seeing  that  you  are  carnal'  All  this  consecution 
refers  to  irvsvixanKols,  spiritual  men,  in  v.  13.  Nor  does 


75  APPENDIX  T. 

it  seem  unimportant  that  the  verb  Kpivzi  thus  speedily 
follows  its  compound  avyicplvsL.  The  help  in  judging 
which  one  spiritual  man  gives  another  has  for  its 
result,  that  each  Kplvsi,  is  able  to  judge.  (2)  The 
whole  chapter  dwells  not  upon  inspired  writings,  but 
upon  inspired  men.  St.  Paul  claims  for  himself  and 
the  other  apostles  that  they  are  such  :  but  their 
disciples  also  must  be  inspired  men,  irvsvfiaTLKol 
(spiritual,  not  carnal),  in  order  to  receive  spiritual 
teaching  profitably.  Worldly  wisdom  and  worldly 
greatness  avail  nothing  for  such  a  purpose  (vv.  5-9, 
14).  We  apostles,  he  says  (he  the  only  learned  one 
in  the  ordinary  sense),  tell  you  the  things  bestowed 
by  the  grace  of  God  (12,  13)  not  in  words  taught  of 
human  wisdom,  but  in  words  taught  of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  to  which  he  adds,  Trvsv/jLartKa  irvsv^ariKols 
(TvyKpLvovTss.  Now  if  these  three  words  are  ren- 
dered as  in  the  Authorised  Version,  and  explained, 
as  Prof  Blunt  understood  them,  *  comparing  one 
place  of  Scripture  {i.e.  the  Old  Testament)  with 
another,'  then  we  have  a  purely  intellectual  (psychic) 
operation,  the  work  of  a  scholarly  student,  rudely 
thrust  in  here,  and  jarring,  as  a  false  note,  with  the 
whole  tone  of  the  chapter,  which  calls  upon  *  spiritual 
men '  to  accept,  as  its  proper  recipients,  '  the  spiritual 
teaching '  of  the  inspired  fishermen  of  Galilee  as  well 
as  that  of  the  inspired  student  of  Tarsus.  It  may  be 
that  some  persons  defend  the  Authorised  Version 
without  narrowing  it  to  the  comparison  of  written 
documents.  I  cannot  fully  estimate  any  such  view 
without  having  it  before  me.  Yet  it  seems  to  me 
that   it  can  only  consist  in  some  mystical  notion  of 


APPENDIX  L  ^j 

St.  PauFo  inner  conscicusness.  And  this  would  seem 
to  me  a  Go(f:ia  not  less  rudely  introduced,  not  less 
jarring  with  the  tone  of  the  context,  than  the  more 
limited  sense  in  which  Prof.  Blunt  has  taken  the 
words.  I  cannot  therefore  reconcile  myself  to  any 
interpretation  but  that  which  makes  irvsvixanKols 
masculine.  I  think  it  is  masculine  also  in  xii.  i, 
because  the  immediate  context  speaks  of  the  distin- 
guishing signs  of  spiritual  men.  But  as  the  chapter 
goes  on  to  treat  of  spiritual  things  also,  the  error,  if 
it  be  one,  is  not  of  much  importance. 

II.  Rom.  viii.  33-4.  We  read  in  the  Authorised 
Version,  '  Who  shall  lay  any  thing  to  the  charge  of 
God's  elect  ^  It  is  God  that  justifieth.  Who  is  he 
that  condemneth  .''  It  is  Christ  that  died,  yea  rather, 
that  is  risen  again,  who  is  even  at  the  right  hand  of 
God,  who  also  maketh  intercession  for  us.' 

This  version  assumes  that  full  stops  are  to  be 
placed  after  'justifieth'  and  'for  us  ; '  and  that  the 
only  notes  of  interrogation  are  those  which  follow 
the  words  '  elect '  and  '  condemneth.'  Also  it  assumes 
that  the  true  reading  is  6  KaraKplvcov,  '  he  that  con- 
demneth,' not  6  KaraKpivMv,  'he  that  shall  condemn.' 
Tittmann's  edition  has  (except  thatit  keeps  KaraKpivwv) 
Tls  iy/caXsasL  Kara  5k\sktmv  ®sov  ;  Oeos*  6  hiKaioiv  ; 
ris  6  KaraicpLvwv',  ^picrTos  0  aTToOavcov)  /jloXXov  Ss  koX 
s'yspOsls ;  OS  Kal  sanv  iv  Ss^ia  rod  ©sou ;  os  koI 
svTv^')(^obvsL  vTTsp  rj/jLMv  ',  I  thiuk  comuias  would  answer 
the  purpose  after  diroOavcov,  iyspOsLs,  and  rod  Ssov, 
but  (with  this  variation)  I  have  no  doubt  Tittmann  is 
right.  The  superior  force  and  beauty  of  the  interro- 
gatives  can   escape   no   intelligent  mind :    and   what 


78  APPENDIX  I. 

clinches  the  argument  in  their  favour  is  the  exact 
paralleHsm  of  the  next  verse,  35  :  T/s*  i^yuas  "^wplcrzi 
diro  rrjs  dyd7rr]9  rov  l^ptarov  ;  BXl'y^n^,  1)  arsvo'^wpLa, 
rj  Stcoy/jLos,  rj  Xifjuo^,  rj  yv^voTi^s,  rj  Kivhvvos,  7)  pi^d^aipa  ; 
Therefore  I  would  render  33,  34,  'Who  shall  accuse 
God's  elect  ?  Will  God  who  justifieth  ?  Who  is  he 
that  shall  condemn  ?  Will  Christ  who  died,  nay 
more,  who  also  rose,  who  is  also  on  God's  right 
hand,  who  also  intercedeth  for  us  ? '  The  words  '  yea 
rather,'  and  *  even,'  in  the  Authorised,  are  very  faulty. 

III.  Phil.  iii.  16,  17.  The  words  of  16,  it\7]v, 
sis  o  i(j)6d(Ta/jbsv,  tc5  avTM  aroi'^sLv,  are  much  more 
fitly  taken  as  a  modest  preface  to  v.  17  than  in  the 
very  harsh  construction  which  makes  (ttoi^^slv  an  infini- 
tive used  imperatively,  refers  tw  avTM  to  the  relative 
o,  and  puts  a  full  stop  after  aTOi')(elv.     The  words  sis 

0  s(p6daap,sv  are  a  well-known  parenthetic  idiom — 
quoniam  hue  (i.e.  ad  hanc  doctrinam)  processimus, 
ut  eadem  viagraderemur;  the  clause  rw  avro)  (ttoij(sIv 
being  in  apposition  to  the  relative  o.  I  render,  there- 
fore, '  Nevertheless,  as  we  have  so  far  attained,  to  walk 
by  the  same  rule,  brethren,  be  ye  with  common  con- 
sent imitators  of  me,'  &c. :  i.e.  as  we  have  learnt  the 
duty  and  wisdom  of  union  and  uniform  conduct.  The 
context  before  and  after  v.  16  proves  that  it  is  so 
connected  with  v.  17  and  what  follows. 

IV.  Rom.    ix.    5.       On    this    important    passage 

1  have  for  very  many  years  felt  no  doubt  that 
the  punctuation  and  interpretation  given  in  my 
sermon  are  true.  There  are  four  various  punctua- 
tions, and  four  corresponding  translations,  which  I 
will  first  set  down,  and  then  discuss  in  my  own  order. 


APPENDIX  I.  79 

(1)  KoX  i^  MV  6  KpLCTTOs  TO  Karct  acipfca,  6  o)v  sttI 
TravTwv,  0SO9  sv\oyr]T09  sl9  tovs  alcbvas  •  dfjir/p.  Auth. 
Vers.  *  and  of  whom  according  to  the  flesh  Christ 
came,  who  is  over  all,  God  blessed  for  ever.  Amen.' 

(2)  Kal  if  MV  6  ^pLo-Tos  TO  Kara  crdpKa.  'O  cov 
sttI  irdvTwv  Ssos  svXoyrjro^  sl9  tov9  alcovas '  dfjirjv. 
'  And  of  whom  is  the  Christ  after  the  flesh.  God  who 
is  over  all  be  (is)  blessed  for  ever.     Amen.' 

(3)  Kal  if  MP  6  Xpccrrbs  to  /caTa  crdp/ca,  6  cop  iirl 
irdpTwp.  (^sos  £v\oy7]Tos  sis  T0V9  alcopas  •  d/juyp.  *  And 
of  whom  is  the  Christ  after  the  flesh,  who  is  over  all. 
God  be  (is)  blessed  for  ever.     Amen.' 

(4)  Kal  if  MP  6  Xpio-Tos  TO  KaTCL  crdpKa.  'O  mp 
STTI  iraPTMP  ^£09,  ev\oyr]Tos  ds  tov9  auMPas  *  dfjurfp, 
'  And  of  whom  is  the  Christ  after  the  flesh.  He 
who  is  over  all  is  God,  blessed  for  ever.     Amen.' 

The  last  of  these  is  the  interpretation  which  I 
have  advocated  as  the  only  true,  the  only  unobjec- 
tionable one.  I  shall  now  compare  it  in  the  first 
instance  with  (2)  and  (3).  Each  of  these  latter 
labours  under  a  weighty  objection,  which  has  been 
constantly  urged  against  them  :  namely,  that  in  the 
elliptical  ascription  of  blessing  £v\oy7]T09  or  ev- 
\oyrjfj.spo9  is  elsewhere  (and  ought  to  bej  the  first 
word.  From  this  objection  (4)  is  exempt,  for  it 
makes  the  words  6  mp  sttI  irdpTMP  ^569  a  sentence, 
®s69  being  its  predicative  noun,  to  which  su\oyi]T69 
belongs  as  an  adjunct  epithet.  The  ellipse  of  saTi 
in  such  a  sentence  is  one  of  the  most  ordinary 
character,  and  indeed  almost  demanded  by  the  pre- 
sence of  MP.  The  grammatical  construction  is  there- 
fore unimpeachable.     A  much  bolder  ellipsis  of  saTl 


8o  APPENDIX  L 

before  the  predicative  %zos  appears  2  Cor.  i.  21  : 
o  Se  ^s^aiMV  rjfjids  aijv  v/jllv  sis  l^piarov  kol  '^ploas 
r)/jidsy  ©eoy.  But  6sos  svXoyrjros  for  deos  sarco  ev- 
XoyrjTos  I  regard  as  far  from  unimpeachable.  No 
example  of  the  ellipse  of  a  third  person  imperative 
has  ever  to  my  mind  been  satisfactorily  established, 
though  that  of  opt.  slt)  occurs  in  every  epistle.  That 
from  this  ascription  in  the  New  Testament  ^be' 
should  be  excluded  and  *  is '.  adopted  seems  proved 
by  Rom.  i.  25,  69  sanv  svXoyijros,  with  which  corre- 
sponds 2  Cor.  xi.  31,  o  cbp  svXoyrjTos.  (In  John 
xii.  13,  A.  V.  writes  'is.')  Therefore  I  hold  that 
in  Eph.  i.  3,  '  Blessed  is '  should  be  written  for 
'  Blessed  be.'  Again  in  i  Pet.  i.  3.  Thus,  while  doc- 
trinally  there  is  no  important  distinction  between  (2) 
and  (4),  yet,  grammatically,  (4)  is  incomparably 
superior. 

It  remains  to  consider  the  Authorised  Version, 
which  has  to  encounter  objections  of  a  different  kind, 
objections  which  I  hold  to  be  fatal  to  it.     For — 

I.  While  St.  Paul  distinctly  declares  our  Lord's 
divine  nature  in  at  least  two  chapters,  Phil,  ii.,  Col.  i., 
and,  I  think,  implies  it  always,  there  are  but  two 
places  where  he  is  supposed  to  ascribe  to  Him  the 
predicate  Osos,  while  the  passages  are  numerous  in 
which  he  purposely  distinguishes  between  6  6s6s  (6 
irarrip),  and  o  KvpLos  'Irjaovs  ^piaros. 

To  these  passages  I  must  now  invite  attention. 

(i)  No  passage  is  more  important  in  this  discus- 
sion than  the  opening  verses  of  Romans,  chap,  i., 
since  in  these  St.  Paul  treats  doctrinally  of  Christ's 
nature.     Himself  is  set  apart  (he  says)  to  carry  'the 


APPENDIX  I.  8 1 

good  tidings  (gospel)  of  God  .  .  .  concerning  His  Son, 
— who  was  born,  after  His  human  nature  (flesh),  of 
David's  lineage  ;  but  after  His  divine  nature  (the 
Spirit  of  holiness)  was  declared  miraculously  {hv 
SvvdfjLSi),  by  rising  from  the  dead,  to  be  the  Son  of 
God — even  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.'  In  other  words, 
that  same  Jesus,  whom,  we  acknowledge  to  be  Christ 
the  Lord,  was  declared  to  be  the  Son  of  God  (the 
divine  Messiah),  not,  be  it  observed,  to   be  (dso9  iiri 

TTCLVTOdV. 

(2)  Next  let  us  observe  the  relation  between 
^£09  {irarrip)  and  ^Irjaov9  'Kpiaro^,  as  exhibited  in 
the  salutations  prefixed  to  the  various  epistles  of 
St.  Paul. 

Rom.  i.    7 :   x^P^^   ^/^^^   '^^^    slprjvr)    airo  %zo\} 

irarpos   r]iJLo)v    teal    Kvplov    ^Irjaov  X.pL(TTOu : 

'Grace  to    you    and    peace    from    God    our 

Father  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.' 

The  same  is  found  in   i   Cor.  i.  3  ;  2  Cor.  ii.  2  ; 

Eph.  i.  2  ;   Phil.  i.  2. 
Gal.  i.  2  and  2  Thess.  i.  2  have  the  same,  except 

'  the  '  for  *  our.' 
Col. :  '  Grace  to  you  and  peace  from  God 
our  Father,'  (followed  by)  '  We  give  thanks 
to  God  the  Father  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,'  &c. 
I  Thess.  i.  I  :  '  Unto  the  church  of  the  Thessa- 
lonians  in  God  the  Father  and  the  Lord 
Jesus  Christ :  Grace  to  you  and  peace.' 

1  Tim.  i.  2  :  '  Grace,   mercy,   peace,  from   God 

the  Father  and  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord.' 

2  Tim.  i.  2  :  As  in  i  Tim. 

G 


82  APPENDIX  I. 

Tit.    i.    4 :    '  Grace    and  peace  from    God    the 
Father,  and  Christ  Jesus  our  Saviour.' 
(3)  The  following  passages  are  cited  from  other 
parts  of  St.  Paul's  epistles  : — 

Rom.  XV.  6 :  '  That  with  one  accord  ye  may 
with  one  mouth  glorify  the  God  and  Father 
of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.' 

1  Cor.  i.  9  :  '  God  is  faithful,  through  whom  ye 

were  called  into  the  fellowship  of  His  Son 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord  ; '  viii.  6  :  '  To  us 
there  is  one  God,  the  Father,  .  .  .  and  one 
Lord  Jesus  Christ.' 

2  Cor.  i.  3  :  *  Blessed  be  \is\  the  God  and  Father 

of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ ;'  repeated  Eph.  i.  3 : 
'  The  Son  of  God,  Jesus  Christ'  {See  also 
iv.  6;  v.  19.) 

Gal.  i.  I  :  '  Through  Jesus  Christ,  and  God  the 
Father.' 

Eph.  vi.  23  :  '  Peace  be  to  the  brethren,  and 
love  with  faith,  from  God  the  Father  and 
the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.'     {See  v.  20.) 

Phil.  ii.  5-1 1.  (This  great  crucial  passage  as 
rendered  in  Revised  Version  should  be  care- 
fully pondered.) 

Col.  (Chapters  i.,  ii.,  and  iii.  to  verse  ij  are  essen- 
tial to  the  study  of  the  question  before  us  ; 
they  declare  Christ's  divinity  very  plainly, 
but  nowhere  call  Him  ©sos-.) 

1  Thess.   iii.    11:    '  Now    may    our    God    and 

Father  Himself,  and  our  Lord  Jesus,  direct 
our  way  unto  you.'     {See  i.  3,  9,  10.) 

2  Thess.  i.   12:  'That  the  name  of  our  Lord 


APPENDIX  I.  83 

Jesus  Christ  may  be  glorified  in  you,  and  ye 
in  Him,  according  to  the  grace  of  our  God 
and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ;'  ii.  16:  'Now 
our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  Himself,  and  God  our 
Father '  &c.  (Observe  the  loftiness  of  divinity 
which  this  verse,  and  the  whole  of  this  early 
epistle,  ascribe  to  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  but 
without  calling  Him  %zo9,) 

1  Tim.  i.  I  :  *  Paul,  an  apostle  of  Christ  Jesus, 

according  to  the  commandment  of  God  our 
Saviour,  and  Christ  Jesus  our  hope.'  See 
in  i.  12,  &c.,  the  greatness  and  goodness  of 
'  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord,'  the  Saviour  of 
sinners  and  ensample  of  all  that  shall  be- 
heve  in  Him  ;  ending  with  the  doxology 
17:  Now  unto  the  King  eternal,  incorrupt- 
ible, invisible,  the  only  God,  be  \is\  honour 
and  glory  for  ever  and  ever.  Amen.  (Com- 
pare ii.  5,  6,  and  the  memorable  place,  iii.  16, 
which,  by  the  reading  os,  now  universally 
received,  calls  Jesus  Himself  the  fjbvarrjpiov 
dsorrjTos^  as  in  Col.  ii.  2,  3.)  See  v.  21  ; 
vi.  13. 

2  Tim.  iv.  I  :  *  I  charge  thee  in  the  sight  of  God 

and  of  Christ  Jesus '  &c. 
Our  quotations  from  St.  Paul's  epistles  have  now 
brought  us  face  to  face  with  the  passage.  Tit.  ii.  13. 
This  is  the  only  place  in  which  I  am,  unhappily,  com- 
pelled to  argue  against  the  rendering  of  the  Revised 
Version,  except  in  the  passages  upon  which  my 
opinion  was  expressed  in  my  sermon  of  1861  at  Cam- 
bridge, now   reprinted  ;    it  being  understood   that   I 

G  2 


84  APPENDIX  1. 

was  free  to  defend  those  opinions.     And  this  defence 
involves  a  defence  of  the  Authorised  Version   in  ren- 
dering   here    tov    ixe^yaXov    ©sot)    koI    ^corrjpos  rj/xcov 
^l7](Tov  Xptarov,  *  the  great  God  and  our  Saviour  Jesus 
Christ.'     This  the  majority  of  the  revisers  have  placed 
in  the  margin,  giving  in  their  text  'our  great  God  and 
Saviour  Jesus  Christ.'     My  friend  Mr.  Humphry,  in 
his  tract,  p.  10,  applauds  and  welcomes  this  decision  as 
'  a  more  clear  declaration  of  the  Godhead  of  Christ'    I 
am  sorry  to  differ  from  him,  but  I  do  differ  from  him — 
I  will  not  say  toto  cceio,  for  I  think  the  Scriptural  de- 
claration of  Christ's  Godhead  stands  in  no  need  of  this 
translation,  nor  of  that  received  in  Rom.  ix.  5.     To 
my  mind  the  doctrine  is  clearly  enough  declared  in 
Phil,  and  Col.,  and  assumed  by  the  apostle  through- 
out his  writings,   as  well  as   in  his  history  given   by 
St.   Luke.     But    I    believe  that   he   has    everywhere 
avoided  predicating   Christ   by  the  title  ^eos,  and   I 
point  to  the   passage    i   Tim.   i.    12-17,  crowned  by 
ii.  5-7  and  iii.  16,  and   illustrated  by  the  two  epistles 
above  named  and  by  Rom.  i„  &c.,  as  containing  and 
justifying  the  view  which  I  take  of  his  doctrinal  stand- 
point on   this  /jbV(TT7]pLov  6s6t7]to9.     Its  logical   com- 
pletion, as  deduced  from  his  writings  and  those  of  other 
apostles  and  evangelists,  came  in  God's  good  time  at 
another  epoch  of  Church  history.     Referring  to  the 
Greek  of  this  passage,  I  admit,  of  course,  the  possi- 
bility,  nay,  even  the  plausibility  of  the  rendering  in 
.  the  revised  text.     But  I  do  not  concede  its  necessity  ; 
and  I  contest  its  analogical  fitness,  as  compared  with 
St.   Paul's  writings   generally,  and  with   this    epistle 


APPENDIX  L  85 

itself.     Necessary  it  is   not.     As   a  Greek  scholar,   I 
deny  that  crcorripo^  rjfiMv  is  necessarily  controlled  by 
the  article  rov  before  /jusydXcv  ^sov :  and  I  feel  assured 
that  St.   Paul,  having  written  in  i.  4  'from   God  the 
Father  and  Christ  Jesus  our  Saviour,'  would  not  have 
expected  anybody  reading  this  Greek  to  doubt  that 
Tov    /jLsydXov    Ssov    represents     Ssov    irarpos,    and 
^coTf]po9  Tj/jiMP  ^l7](7ov  XpcaTov  reprcscuts  the  previous 
X.pt(TTov  ^Itjctov  tov  XcoTTjpos  Tjficov.      If  such  wcrc  the 
mind  of  Paul  when  he  wrote  this,  he  might  fearlessly 
omit  the  second  article  before  ^corrjpos,  as  ^schylus 
has  omitted  it  before  Kparr^advTwv  in  the  passage  koI 
TO)v dXovrcov  Kal  K parr] a dvTOJV  8 i')(^a  \  cfxovasd/covscvhaTL, 
Again.  301.     The  poet,  depaiting  from  grammatical 
usage,  omits  a  second  tcov  before  KparTjcrdpTcov:  why.'* 
because  the  captured  and  the  conquerors  could  not  be 
taken  for  the  same,  and  his  readers  or  his  audience 
could    make   no    mistake.     Neither   would   St.    Paul 
deem  it  necessary  to  place  a  tov  before  awTYjpos,  as 
he  had  never  called  Christ  Jesus  '  the  great  God,'  and 
in  the  beginning  of  his  epistle  he  had  called  Him  *  our 
Saviour,'  distinctly  from  God  the  Father.     If,  indeed, 
he   had   written  tov  ©sou  koI  awTTjpos,  there    might 
have  been  some  chance  of  mistake  ;  ^  but  the  epithet 
fisyaXov    removes,    or    ought  to   remove,  all  chance, 
being  a  well-known   Old  Testament  attribute  of  the 
supreme  God.      Even   in  the   Revelations,   v.   13,  to 
which  the  passage  before  us  leads  attention,  we  find 

^  Yet  in  i  Tim.  v.  21  the  Auth.  renders  rov  Qeov  koI  Kvplov 
'Irjaod  XpccTTod,  '  God,  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.'  The  Revi- 
sion omits  livplov,  rendering  '  God,  and  Jesus  Christ.' 


86  APPENDIX  I, 

distinction  still  kept  between  God  and  the  glorified 
Jesus  (ch.  i.),  between  '  Him  who  sitteth  on  the  throne' 
and  '  the  Lamb.'  On  these  grounds  I  hope  to  be 
forgiven  for  saying  that  I  adhere  to  the  Authorised 
Version  of  Tit.  ii.  1 3>  which  now  stands  in  the  revised 
margin  ;  and  since  (with  Mr.  Humphry)  I  do  not 
advocate  '  servile  adherence  to  the  Greek  order,'  I 
should  not  have  been  disturbed  if  *  the  Saviour ' 
had  ended  the  verse,  as  in  i.  4.  Thus  my  conclusion 
is  that  Tit.  ii.  13  can  never  be  justly  cited  as 
proving  that  St.  Paul  has  designated  Christ  Jesus 
by  the  predicate  %zos.  Of  Rom.  ix.  5  I  say  the  same. 
Let  us  now  compare  the  other  doxologies  found 
in  St.  Paul's  writings  with  that  in  Rom.  ix.  5. 

Rom.  i.  25  :  'And  worshipped  and   served  the 
creature   rather   than   the    Creator,  who    is 
blessed  for  ever.     Amen.' 
Rom.  xi.  36  :  *  To  Him  be  \is\  the  glory  for  ever. 

Amen.' 
2  Cor.  xi.  3 1  :    '  The  God    and  Father  of  the 
Lord  Jesus,  He  who  is  blessed  for  evermore, 
knoweth  that  I  lie  not' 
Gal.  i.  5  :  '  Our  God  and  Father ;  to  whom  be 

\is\  the  glory  for  ever  and  ever.     Amen.' 
Eph.  i.  3  :  '  Blessed  be  \is\  the  God  and  Father 

of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ'     (So  i  Pet  i.  3.) 
Eph.  iii.  21  :  '  Unto  Him  be  \is\  the  glory  in  the 
church  and  in  Christ  Jesus  unto  all  genera- 
tions for  ever  and  ever.     Amen.' 
Phil.  iv.  20 :  '  Now  unto  God  our  Father  be  \is\ 

the  glory  for  ever  and  ever.     Amen.' 
I  Tim.   i.   17:    *  Now   unto    the   King  eternal. 


APPENDIX  I.  87 

incorruptible,  invisible,  the  only  God,  be  [?>] 
honour  and  glory  for  ever  and  ever.  Amen.' 

1  Tim.   vi.    15:    'He   shall   show,   who    is    the 

blessed  and  only  Potentate,  the  King  of 
kings,  and  Lord  of  lords  ;  who  alone  hath 
immortality,  dwelling  in  light  unapproach- 
able ;  whom  no  man  hath  seen,  nor  can  see  : 
to  whom  be  \is\  honour  and  power  eternal. 
Amen.' 

2  Tim.  iv.  18:  *  To  whom  be  \is\  the  glory  for 

ever  and  ever.    Amen.'    [In  this  passage  '  to 

whom '  refers  to  o  Y^vpios,  and  it  is  possible 

to  contend  that  this  means  the  Lord  Jesus 

Christ.     Careful  examination  of  the  epistle 

.  will   not,  I  think,   lead   to   this  conclusion. 

Jesus  is  twice  called  '  our  Lord  '  (i.  2,  8) ; 

but    *the    Lord,'    so    frequently   recurring, 

generally  {see  i.   18;  ii.  7,  14,  19,  22)  mitst 

mean  God,  and  may  do  so  always.] 

All    these    doxologies,    then,    with    their   solemn 

Amens,  are  to  the  honour  of  God  supreme,  not  of 

6  Ysjvpios  'l7]crov9  l^ptaros. 

Heb.  xiii.  21  is  ambiguous  ;  and  although  I  am 
convinced  that  w  {to  whom)  refers  to  the  subject  6 
©SOS,  some  may  choose  to  contend  that  it  belongs  to 
the  proximate  'Irjaov  Xpiarov. 

Compare  i  Pet.  v.  1 1  :  '  To  Him   [God]   be  [u] 

the  dominion  for  ever  and  ever.     Amen.' 
Jude  25  :  *  To  the  only  God  our  Saviour,  through 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord,  be  [zs]  glory,  majesty, 
dominion,  and  power,  before  all   time,  and 
now  and  for  evermore.     Amen.' 


88  APPENDIX  I. 

In  2  Pet.  iii.  1 8  the  doxology  is  to  'our  Lord  and 
Saviour  Jesus  Christ'  But  this  epistle  was  one  of 
the  ancient  avTiXs'yoiJLsva,  and  among  those  who  have 
denied  its  genuineness  are  Calvin,  Neander,  and 
Olshausen. 

Those  who,  after  examining  all  these  passages 
(to  which  many  might  have  been  added),  and  weigh- 
ing the  intrinsic  probability  founded  on  their  accumu- 
lated evidence,  can  approve  the  authorised  text  and 
translation  in  Rom.  ix.  5,  or  the  revised  translation 
in  Tit.  ii.  1 3,  have  minds  very  differently  constituted 
from  mine.  If  St.  Paul,  in  the  outset  of  his  epistle, 
doctrinally  declares  his  Good-tidings  concerning  the 
Son  of  God,  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord ;  and  after  speak- 
ing of  Him,  Kara  adpKa,  as  in  ix.  3,  does  not  add 
that  He  is  6sos  (Kara  irvEvfia),  but  vlos  ©soi),  how 
can  those  w^ho  have  a  satisfactory  alternative  be 
expected  to  believe  that  in  ix.  5  he  all  of  a  sudden 
calls  the  Christ  *  God  over  all,  blessed  for  ever ' } 

And  this  he  is  supposed  to  do  in  a  place  where  he 
is  consoling  the  Jews  by  enumerating  their  many  and 
great  privileges,  especially  that  of  being  the  country- 
men of  6  ^piaros  TO  Kara  adpKa.  If  indeed  the  Jews 
of  St.  Paul's  time  had  been  expecting  their  Messiah 
to  be  the  supreme  God  (6  IttI  TrdvTwv)  manifest  in  the 
flesh,  there  might  be  some  ground  for  maintaining  the 
ascription.  But  no  such  expectation  existed  among 
them.  Of  an  incarnate  God  they  had  no  idea,  no 
anticipation. 

The  interpretation  which  I  support  is  in  striking 
harmony  with  Eph.  iv.  4—6:   sv  aay/xa   koI  sv  Hvsvfia, 

KaOoiS    Kal  SKX'^OtJTS  sv  /JLLO,  sXtTlBc    TTjS    Kkl]0-£WS   V/JiMV' 


APPENDIX  L  89 

zh  Y^vpios^  jxla  irians^  %v  ^dirTia^a^  zh  ^sos  /cat 
Trarrjp  iravrcov,  6  iirl  Trdvrcov,  koI  8id  irdvTWV^  koI  sv 
irdo-Lv.  As,  in  recounting  Jewish  privileges,  he  crowns 
the  list  by  saying  that  God  (the  one  God  of  Israel) 
is  *  over  all,'  so  here,  recounting  Christian  privileges, 
St.  Paul  adds  that  God  the  Father  (of  His  redeemed 
children)  is  '  over  all,'  and  more  than  this,  is  '  through 
all  and  in  them  all '  (i.e.  by  His  Holy  Spirit). 

Lachmann  and  Meyer  are  among  the  most  emi- 
nent interpreters  who  punctuate  fully  after  adpKa. 
But  the  revised  margin  is  not  accurate  in  ascribing 
this  view  to  moderns  only.  See  the  second  volume 
of  Professors  Westcott  and  Hort :  Introduction  and 
Appendix  to  their  Text  of  the  N.  T.  At  p.  109, 
stating  the  external  evidence  on  this  question,  they 
show  that  the  oldest  Greek  MSS.,  Aleph,  B,  A,  have 
no  punctuation  in  the  passage,  but  that  C  (Codex 
Ephraemi)  and  some  good  cursives  have  a  full  stop 
after  adpica.  This  is  quite  sufficient  to  prove  the 
existence  of  the  interpretation  for  which  I  contend 
before  the  fifth  century.  A  probability  is  also  shown 
that  Origen  held  this  opinion.  And  Dr.  Hort  him- 
self says  that  such  punctuation  alone  seems  adequate 
to  account  for  the  whole  of  the  language  employed, 
more  especially  when  it  is  considered  in  relation  to 
the  context. 

Finally,  this  passage  can  never  be  cited  in  any 
controversy:  for  the  other  party  would  at  once  deny 
the  *  orthodox '  punctuation  and  translation  to  be 
correct ;  and  by  what  force  of  argument  is  he  to  be 
silenced,  when  manuscripts  prove  nothing  on  one 
side  or  on  the  other,  and  internal  probability  is  all  in 


90  APPENDIX  I. 

all  ?  Is  any  good  purpose  served  by  clinging  to  un- 
tenable interpretations,  any  more  than  to  untenable 
readings  ?     '  Sursum  corda  !  '  ^ 

^  In  Matt.  i.  20  and  Luke  i.  35  the  Authorised  translators 
have  rendered  Hagion  Pneuma  ''the  Holy  Ghost/  though  it  has 
no  article  :  and  the  Revisers  follow  them.  In  Tit.  ii.  13  they 
have  not  carried  on  tov  to  2coTrjpos  :  the  Revisers  have  carried 
it  on,  and  are  applauded  as  giving  'a.  more  clear  declaration 
of  the  Godhead  of  Christ.'  This  '  clutching  at  straws '  does 
not  seem  to  serve  the  cause  of  orthodoxy,  but  to  damage  it. 
If  St.  Paul  had  called  our  Saviour  deos  in  these  places,  as  He  is 
more  than  once  called  in  St.  John's  Gospel,  this  would  not 
prove  that  the  apostles  and  their  age  had  been  taught  to  look 
behind  the  veil  of  that  great  fxvaTTjpiov  deoTrjTos.  It  would  still 
be  true  that  the  logical  definitions  of  our  creeds,  drawn  from 
Scriptural  data,  grew  in  later  days  out  of  the  need  felt  in  the 
Church  of  silencing  the  over-curious  speculations  of  erring 
men.  But  let  it  be  seen  that  all  those  data  are  sound.  Bishop 
Shuttleworth  was  a  learned  and  candid  divine ;  but  in  his  Para- 
phrase of  the  Epistles,  p.  345,  he  writes,  on  i  Tim.  iii.  16,  '  If  we 
admit  the  commonly  received  and  more  probable  reading,  Qeos, 
in  preference  to  the  6s-  contended  for  djy  the  Socinians^  it  will 
form  an  epitome  of  belief  consisting  of  the  following  articles  : 
first,  the  divinity  and  incarnation  of  Christ,'  &c.,  &c.  And  6? 
is  now  allowed  by  all  wise  and  candid  divines  of  our  Church 
to  be  the  true  reading.  Since  the  fivaTrjpiov  is  Christ  himself, 
there  is  not  the  very  slightest  difficulty  in  its  bemg  referred  to 
by  a  masculine  relative. 


91 


APPENDIX    II. 

The  following  paper  by  Professor  Ezra  Abbot,  D.D., 
LL.D.,  is  reprinted  from  the  Sunday  School  Times 
of  May  21,  1881,  p.  340  : — 

A  VERY  important  part  of  the  work  of  the  new 
revision  has  consisted  in  the  settlement  of  the  Greek 
text  to  be  followed  in  the  translation.  This  was  a 
duty  which  could  not  be  evaded.  To  undertake  to 
correct  merely  the  mistranslations  in  the  common 
English  version,  without  reference  to  the  question  of 
the  genuineness  of  the  text,  would  be  equivalent  to 
saying  that,  while  the  mistakes  of  translators  must  be 
rectified,  those  of  transcribers  and  editors  should  be 
regarded  as  sacred.  It  would  be  deliberately  im- 
posing on  the  Christian  public  hundreds  of  readings 
which  all  intelligent  scholars,  on  the  ground  of  deci- 
sive evidence,  now  agree  in  rejecting  as  spurious. 

That  there  should  be  many  mistakes  in  our  manu- 
scripts of  the  Greek  New  Testament,  as  there  are  in 
all  other  manuscripts  of  ancient  authors,  and  that  a 
portion  of  these  mistakes  should  be  capable  of  correc- 
tion only  by  the  comparison  of  many  different  copies, 
was  inevitable  in  the  nature  of  things,  unless  a  per- 
petual   miracle    should    be   wrought.      That   such    a 


92  APPENDIX  II. 

miracle  has  not  been  wrought  is  shown  by  the  multi- 
tude of  '  various  readings '  which  a  comparison  of 
copies  has  actually  brought  to  light,  the  number  of 
which  was  roughly  reckoned  at  thirty  thousand  in 
the  days  of  Mill  (1707),  and  may  now  be  estimated 
at  not  fewer  than  one  hundred  thousand. 

This  host  of  various  readings  may  startle  one  who 
is  not  acquainted  with  the  subject,  and  he  may 
imagine  that  the  whole  text  of  the  New  Testament  is 
thus  rendered  uncertain.  But  a  careful  analysis  will 
'^  show  that  nineteen-twentieths  of  these  are  of  no 
more  consequence  than  the  palpable  errata  in  the 
first  proof  of  a  modern  printer  ;  they  have  so  little 
authority,  or  are  so  manifestly  false,  that  they  may 
be  at  once  dismissed  from  consideration.  Of  those 
which  remain,  probably  nine-tenths  are  of  no  import- 
ance as  regards  the  sense  ;  the  differences  either 
cannot  be  represented  in  a  translation,  or  affect  the 
form  of  expression  merely,  not  the  essential  meaning 
of  the  sentence.  Though  the  corrections  made  by 
the  revisers  in  the  Greek  text  of  the  New  Testament 
followed  by  our  translators  exceed  five  thousand 
hardly  one-tenth  of  them  will  be  noticed  by  the 
ordinary  reader.  Of  the  residue,  many  are  indeed  of 
sufficient  interest  and  importance  to  constitute  one  of 
the  strongest  reasons  for  making  a  new  revision,  which 
should  no  longer  suffer  the  known  errors  of  copyists 
to  take  the  place  of  the  words  of  the  evangelists  and 
apostles.  But  the  chief  value  of  the  work  accom- 
plished by  the  self-denying  scholars  who  have  spent 
so  much  time  and  labour  in  the  search  for  manu- 
scripts, and  in  their  collation  or  publication,  does  not 


APPENDIX  11.  93 

consist,  after  all,  in  the  corrections  of  the  text  which 
have  resulted  from  their  researches.  These  correc- 
tions may  affect  a  few  of  the  passages  which  have 
been  relied  on  for  the  support  of  certain  doctrines, 
but  not  to  such  an  extent  as  essentially  to  alter  the 
state  of  the  question.  Still  less  is  any  question  of 
Christian  duty  touched  by  the  multitude  of  various 
readings.  The  greatest  service  which  the  scholars 
who  have  devoted  themselves  to  critical  studies  and 
the  collection  of  critical  materials  have  rendered,  has 
been  the  establishment  of  the  fact  that,  on  the  whole, 
the  New  Testament  writings  have  come  down  to  us 
in  a  text  remarkably  free  from  important  corruptions, 
even  in  the  late  and  inferior  manuscripts  on  which 
the  so-called  '  received  text '  was  founded  ;  while  the 
helps  which  we  now  possess  for  restoring  it  to  its 
primitive  purity  far  exceed  those  which  we  enjoy  in 
the  case  of  any  important  classical  author  whose 
works  have  come  down  to  us.  The  multitude  of 
'  various  readings,'  which  to  the  thoughtless  or 
ignorant  seems  so  alarming,  is  simply  the  result  of 
the  extraordinary  richness  and  variety  of  our  critical 
resources. 

At  this  point  it  may  be  well  to  illustrate,  by  a 
brief  statement,  the  difference  between  the  position  of 
the  present  revisers  and  King  James's  translators  270 
years  ago,  as  regards  a  critical  knowledge  of  the 
Greek  text  of  the  New  Testament.  The  translators 
or  revisers  of  161 1  followed  strictly  no  one  edition  of 
the  Greek  Testament,  though  their  revision  seems  to 
agree  more  closely,  on  the  whole,  with  Beza's  later 
editions  (1588   and   1598)  than  with  any  other.     But 


94  APPENDIX  II. 

Beza's  various  editions  (1565-98,  fol.  1 565-1604, 
8vo)  were  founded  mainly  on  Robert  Stephens's 
editions  of  1550  and  155 1.  For  those  editions 
Stephens  had  a  very  imperfect  collation  of  fifteen 
manuscripts  from  the  Royal  Library  at  Paris,  and  of 
the  Complutensian  Polyglot,  whose  readings  were 
given  in  his  margin.  Of  his  manuscripts,  ten  con- 
tained the  Gospels,  eight  the  Acts  and  Epistles,  and 
two  the  Apocalypse.  Two  of  these  manuscripts  of 
the  Gospels  were  valuable  (D  and  L),  but  he  made 
very  little  use  of  them  ;  indeed,  the  manuscript  read- 
ings given  in  his  margin  seem  in  general  to  have 
served  rather  for  show  than  for  use.  Scrivener  has 
noted  119  places  in  which  his  text  is  in  opposition  to 
all  of  them.  That  text  is,  in  fact,  substantially  formed 
from  the  last  editions  of  Erasmus  (1527-35),  which 
differ  very  slightly  from  each  other.  Now  what  was 
Erasmus's  critical  apparatus }  In  the  Gospels  he 
had,  all  told,  three  manuscripts, — one  of  the  tenth 
century,  and  a  good  one,  but  which  he  hardly  ever 
followed,  because  its  text  seemed  so  peculiar  that  he 
was  afraid  of  it.  He  used  as  the  basis  of  his  text  in 
the  Gospels  an  inferior  manuscript  of  the  fifteenth 
century.  In  the  Acts  and  Catholic  Epistles  he  had 
four  modern  manuscripts  ;  in  the  Pauline  Epistles, 
five  ;  in  the  Revelation,  only  one,  an  inaccurate  copy 
of  which  was  used  by  the  printer.  This  manuscript 
was  mutilated,  lacking  the  last  six  verses  of  the  book, 
which  Erasmus  supplied  by  tmnslatijig  back  from  the 
Latin  Vulgate  into  pretty  bad  Greek.  This  was  not 
all.  In  other  passages  he  took  the  liberty  of  correct- 
ing or  supplementing  his  text  from  the  Latin  Vulgate  ; 


APPENDIX  II.  95 

Beza  occasionally  took  a  similar  liberty ;  and  the 
result  is,  that  in  a  considerable  number  of  cases,  not, 
indeed,  in  general  of  much  importance,  the  reading 
of  the  common  English  version  is  supported  by  no 
known  Gj^eek  maniLscript,  but  rests  on  an  error  of 
Erasmus  or  Beza  (for  example,  Acts  ix.  5,  6  ;  Rom. 
vii.  6 ;  2  Cor.  i.  6 ;  i  Pet.  iii.  20 ;  Rev.  i.  9,  11; 
ii.  3,  20,  24  ;  iii.  2  ;  v.  10,  14  ;  xv.  3  ;  xvi.  5  ; 
xvii.  8,  16;  xviii.  2,  &c.).  Such  is  the  foundation 
of  the  text  on  which  the  so-called  Authorised  Version 
was  based. 

It  is  impossible,  without  entering  into  tedious 
detail,  to  give  an  adequate  idea  of  the  immense 
accession  to  our  critical  resources  which  has  resulted 
from  the  lifelong  labours  of  generations  of  scholars 
since  our  common  version  was  made.  I  will  merely 
allude  to  Mill's  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament  (1707), 
on  which  he  spent  thirty  years,  mainly  in  collecting 
materials;  to  Bengel  (1734),  who  did  much  to  estab- 
lish correct  principles  of  criticism  ;  to  Wetstein, 
whose  magnificent  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament 
(1751-52},  in  two  folio  volumes,  represents  the 
arduous  labour  of  forty  years,  and  who  added  greatly 
to  our  knowledge  of  manuscripts,  and  the  quotations 
of  the  Christian  fathers  ;  and  to  the  extensive  colla- 
tions of  manuscripts  by  Alter,  Birch,  with  his 
associates,  and  Matthaei,  the  latter  of  whom  alone 
carefully  examined  more  than  one  hundred.  Above 
all  his  predecessors,  Griesbach  stands  pre-eminent. 
He  not  only  added  much  to  the  materials  already 
collected,  but  was  the  first  to  turn  them  to  proper 
account  in  the  correction  of  the  received  text,  and  in 


96  APPENDIX  II. 

critical  tact  has  perhaps  been  excelled  by  none  of 
those  who  have  succeeded  him.  After  Griesbach, 
who  links  the  last  to  the  present  century,  we  may 
name  the  Roman  Catholic  Scholz,  a  poor  critic,  but 
who  brought  to  light  and  partially  collated  many 
hundreds  of  manuscripts  before  undescribed  ;  Lach- 
mann,  the  eminent  classical  scholar,  whose  original 
genius  gave  a  new  impulse  to  textual  criticism  ; 
Scrivener,  to  whom  we  are  indebted  for  excellent 
editions  of  two  important  uncial  manuscripts  (the 
Codex  Bezae  or  Cambridge  manuscript  of  the  Gospels 
and  the  Acts,  and  the  Codex  Augiensis  of  the  Pauline 
Epistles),  and  for  the  careful  collation  of  about  seventy 
cursive  manuscripts  ;  and,  above  all,  Tischendorf  and 
Tregelles,  whose  indefatigable  labours  have  made  an 
epoch  in  the  history  of  New  Testament  criticism. 
-To  describe  these  labours  here  in  detail  is  utterly  out 
of  the  question.  It  may  suffice  to  say  that,  for  the 
purpose  of  enlarging  and  perfecting  our  critical 
apparatus,  Tischendorf  visited  nearly  all  the  principal 
libraries  of  Europe,  collating  or  copying  for  publica- 
tion the  most  important  manuscripts  of  the  New 
Testament,  whose  text  had  not  before  been  printed. 
Besides  this,  he  took  three  journeys  to  the  East, 
bringing  home  rich  manuscript  treasures,  and  crown- 
ing all  with  the  magnificent  discovery  of  the  Sinai 
manuscript,  of  the  fourth  century,  containing  the 
New  Testament  absolutely  complete.  He  spent 
more  than  eight  years  in  these  travels  and  collations. 
His  editions  of  the  texts  of  Biblical  manuscripts, 
published  by  him  for  the  first  time,  or  for  the  first 
time    accurately,    comprise    no    less    than    seventeen 


APPENDIX  II,  97 

large  quarto  and  five  folio  volumes,  not  counting  the 
*  Anecdota  Sacra  et  Profana,'  and  the  *  Notitia  edi- 
tionis  Codicis  Sinaitici/  two  quarto  volumes  contain- 
ing descriptions  or  collations  of  many  new  manu- 
scripts. Many  of  his  collations,  or  copies  of  important 
manuscripts,  still  remain  unpublished,  though  used  in 
his  last  critical  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament. 
Between  the  years  1840  and  1873  he  issued  as  many 
as  twenty-four  editions  of  the  Greek  New  Testament, 
including  the  re-impressions  of  his  stereotyped  editio 
acadeimca.  Only  four  of  these  editions,  however, 
those  of  1 841,  1849,  1859,  and  1869-72,  are  inde- 
pendently important,  as  marking  great  advances  in 
the  acquisition  of  new  materials.  The  mere  catalogue 
of  Tischendorf's  publications,  prepared  by  Dr.  Gre- 
gory for  the  Bibliotheca  Sacra  (January  1876),  most 
of  them  relating  to  Biblical  criticism,  covers  more 
than  ten  octavo  pages. 

Dr.  Tregelles,  like  Tischendorf,  visited  many  of 
the  principal  European  libraries,  making  three  journeys 
to  the  Continent  for  this  purpose,  and  collated  with 
extreme  care  the  most  important  uncial  manuscripts, 
and  a  number  of  very  valuable  cursives.  He  com- 
pared his  collations  with  those  of  Tischendorf,  and,  in 
case  of  any  discrepancy,  settled  the  question  by  a 
re-examination  of  the  manuscript.  The  only  new 
manuscript  which  he  published  was  the  Codex  Zacyn- 
thius,  a  palimpsest  of  great  value  belonging  to  the 
library  of  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society,  and 
containing  about  a  third  of  the  Gospel  of  Luke. 
He  issued  but  one  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament 
(1857-72),  and  was  disabled  by  paralysis  from  person- 

H 


98  APPENDIX  II. 

ally  completing  the  Prolegomena  or  Introduction  to 
this,  and  from  supplying  the  needful  corrections  and 
additions.  His  accuracy  in  the  statement  of  his 
authorities,  and  the  new  material  incorporated  in  the 
notes,  give  the  work  great  value,  and  the  arrangement 
of  the  matter  is  very  lucid.  But  though  not  to  be 
compared  with  Tischendorf  in  the  extent  of  his  con- 
tributions to  our  stock  of  critical  material,  Dr.  Tre- 
gelles  did  far  more  than  his  rival  to  illustrate  and 
enforce  the  principles  on  which  a  critical  edition  of 
the  Greek  Testament  should  be  based,  and  to  estab- 
lish, by  what  he  called  'comparative  criticism,'  the 
right  of  a  few  of  the  oldest  manuscripts,  in  many 
cases,  to  outweigh  a  vast  numerical  majority  of  later 
authorities.  He  did  far  more,  probably,  than  any 
other  writer,  to  overcome  the  blind  and  unreasoning 
prejudice  which  so  long  existed  in  England  in  favour 
of  the  so-called  '  received  text.' 

A  rough  account  of  the  number  of  Greek  manu- 
scripts of  the  New  Testament  now  known  will  give 
some  idea  of  the  vast  enlargement  of  our  critical 
materials  since  the  time  when  the  common  English 
version  was  made.  We  have  now  for  the  Gospels  60 
uncials  (reckoning  the  six  Psalters,  &c.,  which  contain 
the  hymns  in  Luke  i.  46-55,  68-79;  ii-  29-32), 
ranging  from  the  fourth  century  to  the  tenth,  and 
more  than  600  cursives,  dating  from  the  tenth  century 
to  the  sixteenth  ;  for  the  Acts  and  Catholic  Epistles, 
seventeen  uncials  and  over  200  cursives ;  for  the 
Pauline  Epistles,  twenty  uncials  and  over  280  cur- 
sives ;  for  the  Revelation,  five  uncials  and  about 
TOO  nirqjves.     To  these  are  to  be  added  over  340 


APPENDIX  11. 


99 


Evangelistaries  and  about  eighty  Praxapostoli  ;  that 
is,  manuscripts  containing  the  Lessons  from  the 
Gospels  and  the  Acts  and  Epistles  read  in  the  service 
of  the  church.  This  very  rough  statement,  however, 
requires  much  qualification  to  prevent  a  false  impres- 
sion, as  more  than  half  of  the  uncials  are  mere  frag- 
ments, though  very  valuable  fragments,  and  most  of 
the  others  are  more  or  less  mutilated  ;  while  a  large 
majority  of  the  cursives  have  been  but  partially 
collated,  or  only  inspected.  But  all  of  the  uncials, 
incomparably  the  most  valuable  part  of  the  apparatus, 
have  been  thoroughly  collated  (with  the  exception  of 
the  recently  discovered  Codex  Rossanensis) ;  indeed, 
the  whole  text  of  the  most  valuable  among  them  has 
been  published. 

There  is  another  very  important  class  of  our 
critical  documents  which  can  be  noticed  only  in  the 
briefest  manner.  The  translations  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment into  different  languages,  made  at  an  early  date 
for  the  benefit  of  Christian  converts  ignorant  of  Greek 
— the  a7icient  versiojis,  a5  they  are  commonly  termed — 
represent  the  text  current  in  widely  separated  regions 
of  the  Christian  world,  and  are  often  of  the  highest 
importance  in  settling  questions  of  textual  criticism. 
Two  of  these  versions,  the  Old  Latin  and  the  Cure- 
tonian  Syriac,  belong  to  the  second  century ;  two, 
the  Memphitic  or  Coptic,  and  the  Thebaic  or  Sahidic, 
to  the  earlier  part  of 'the  third  ;  four  more,  the  Peshito 
Syriac  in  its  present  form,  the  Gothic,  the  Latin 
Vulgate,  and  the  Ethiopic  (perhaps)  to  the  fourth  ; 
two,  the  Armenian  and  the  Jerusalem  Syriac,  to  the 
fifth  ;  and  there   are   several  other  later  versions    of 


lOO  APPENDIX   IT. 

considerable  importance,  as  the  Philoxenian  or  Har- 
clean  Syriac  and  the  Slavonic.  The  earlier  editors  of 
the  Greek  Testament  knew  none  of  these  except  the 
Vulgate  and  the  Peshito,  and  the  former  only  in  a 
very  corrupt  text.  They  made  little  use  of  either  of 
them,  except  occasionally  to  corrupt  the  Greek  text 
from  the  more  familiar  Vulgate.  The  Curetonian 
Syriac  is  a  recent  discovery  ;  and  the  value  of  this 
and  of  the  other  early  versions  in  textual  criticism 
can  hardly  be  overestimated.  Our  knowledge  of  the 
Old  Latin  version  or  versions  has  been  very  greatly 
extended  by  the  labours  of  scholars  in  the  present 
century  in  connection  with  the  discovery  of  new 
manuscripts. 

A  third  and  also  very  important  class  of  our  autho- 
rities consists  of  the  numerous  quotatmis  of  the  New 
Testament  by  early  Christian  writers,  many  of  them 
one  or  two  centuries  earlier  than  the  date  of  our 
oldest  manuscripts.  In  respect  to  these,  though  Mill, 
Bengei,  Wetstein,  Sabatier,  Griesbach,  Matthsei,  and 
others  had  made  extensive  collections,  our  critical 
apparatus  has  been  greatly  augmented  by  the  labours 
of  Tischendorf  and  Tregelles. 

The  most  valuable  result  of  these  vast  accessions 
to  our  critical  apparatus  has  been  indirect  rather  than 
direct.  It  has  enabled  us  to  trace  the  outlines  of  the 
history  of  the  text ;  to  determine,  approximately,  the 
relative  value  of  our  different  authorities  and  their 
distinguishing  characteristics  ;  it  has  enabled  us  to 
establish  on  a  solid  foundation  certain  principles  of 
criticism,  which  serve  as  a  guide  through  the  laby- 
rinth of  conflicting  testimonies. 


APPENDIX  III. 

SELECT     TEXTUAL     CORRECTIONS 

in  the  Revised  Version  of  the  New  Testament. 


[The  Former  Column  gives  the  English  of  the  Authorised  Version  :  the  Revised 
Correction  stands  in  the  opposite  Column.  A  (Absent)  impHes  that  the 
Authorised  word  or  words  were  omitted  in  the  Revision  by  preponderant 
authorities.! 


MATTHEW. 

Chapter  I. 

25 

her  firstborn  son  :    . 
Chapter  II. 

• 

a  son: 

18 

lamentation  and 

A 

Chapter  III. 

6 

in  Jordan, 
Chapter  V. 

• 

in  the  river  Jordan, 

21 

by  them  .... 

. 

to  them 

22 

without  a  cause 

. 

A 

27 

by  them  of  old  time, 

. 

A 

30 

be  cast     .... 

• 

go 

44 

bless  them  that  curse  you 

,  do 

good  to  them  that  hate  ^ 

^ou, 

A 

— 

which       .... 

. 

that 

— 

despitefully  use  you  and  . 

. 

A 

47 

pubhcans  so .?  . 

. 

Gentiles  the  same.? 

I02 


APPENDIX  in. 


Chapter  VI. 

I 

alms        .... 

. 

righteousness 

4 

himself     .... 

. 

A 

4, 

6,18     shall  reward  thee  openly. 

shall  recompense  thee. 

5 

when  thou  prayest,  thou 

shalt 

when  ye  pray,  ye  shall 

12 

as  we  forgive   . 

as  we  also  have  forgiven 

13 

for  thine  is  .  ,  .   .  Amen. 

A 

21 

your  ....  your 

thy  ...  .  thy 

25 

and           .... 

or 

33 

the  kingdom  of  God, 

his  kingdom, 

34 

for  the  things  of  itself.     . 
Chapter  VI I. 

for  itself. 

2 

to  you  again.    . 

. 

unto  you. 

24 

I  will  liken  him 

. 

shall  be  likened 

24, 

25     a  rock 

. 

the  rock 

29 

the  scribes. 
Chapter  VIII. 

■ 

their  scribes. 

'5 

unto  them. 

unto  him. 

28 

Gergesenes,      . 

Gadarenes, 

31 

suffer  us  to  go . 

send  us 

32 

into  the  herd  of  swine.    . 

into  the  swine. 

the  whole  herd  of  swine  . 

the  whole  herd 

Chapter   IX. 

8 

they  marvelled, 

. 

they  were  afraid, 

13 

to  repentance. 

. 

A 

35 

among  the  people. 

. 

A 

36 

fainted    and    were     scattered 

abroad. 

• 

were  distressed  and  scati 

Chapter  X. 

3 

Lebbseus,  whose  surname 

was 

A 

4 

Canaanite, 

. 

Cananaean, 

10 

staves  :     .         .         .         . 

, 

staff: 

23 

another:  .... 

. 

the  next : 

SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


103 


Chapter  XI. 


2     two  of 

by 

9    but  what  went  ye  out  for  to 

but  wherefore  went  ye  out?  to 

see  ?    A  prophet  ? 

see  a  prophet  ? 

—     more 

much  more 

16     and  caUing       .... 

which  call 

19     of  her  children. 

by  her  works. 

23     which  art  exaked  unto  heaven, 

shalt  thou  be  exalted  to  heaven  ? 

shalt  be  brought  down  to  hell : 

thou  shalt  go  down  unto  Hades. 

Chapter  XIII. 

9,  43     to  hear        .... 

A 

44    Again 

A 

46    who  

and 

5 1     Jesus  saith  unto  them, 

A 

—     Lord 

A 

Chapter  XIV. 

6    was  kept,          .... 

came, 

13     by  ship, 

in  a  boat. 

30     boisterous         .... 

A 

32     come 

gone  up 

33     came  and          .... 

A 

34     into  the  land  of        .         .         . 

to  the  land,  unto 

Chapter  XV. 

4     commanded,  saying 

said 

6     and  honour  not  his  father  or 

his  mother,  he  shall  be  free. 

he  shall  not  honour  his  father. 

—     the  commandment  . 

the  word 

8     draweth   nigh   unto    me   with 

their  mouth,  and  . 

A 

14    of  the  blind      .... 

A 

17    yet 

A 

39     Magdala.          .... 

Magadan. 

Chapter  XVI. 

3     0  ye  hypocrites. 

A 

4    the  prophet      .... 

A 

13     whom  do  men  say  that  I  the 

who  do  men  say  that  the  Son  0 

Son  of  man  am  1 

man  is  ? 

26     lose  his  own  soul  ?    . 

forfeit  his  life  1 

I04 


APPENDIX  III. 


7 
i6 

17 

22 

23 


Chapter  XVII. 

4 

let  us  make      .... 

I  will  make 

10 

first 

A 

20 

unbelief :           .... 

little  faith : 

21 

Howbeit  ....  fasting.     . 

A 

26 

Peter  saith  unto  him,  Of  stran- 

And when  he  said,  From  stran 

gers. 

gers, 

Chapter  XVIII. 

II 

For  ....  lost. 

A 

29 

at  his  feet         .... 

A 

all 

A 

35 

their  trespasses. 
Chapter  XIX. 

A 

16 

Good  Master,  .... 

Master, 

17 

Why  callest  thou  me  good  ? 

Why  askest  thou  me  concerning 

there  is  none  good  but  one, 

that  which    is    good?      One 

that  is,  God  : 

there  is  who  is  good  : 

20 

from  my  youth  up    . 

A 

29 

or  wife 

A 

Chapter  XX. 
standing  idle,  .... 
and  ....  receive     . 
for  many  ....  chosen.   . 
in  the  way,  and 
and  to  be  ...  .  with  ? 
and  be  ...  .  with  : 
26,  27     let  him  be  . 
30,  31     have  mercy  on  us,  O  Lord, 
34     their  eyes  .... 

Chapter  XXI. 
7     they  set  him 

13     have  made       .... 
15     crying 

Chapter  XXII. 
7     when  the  king  heard  thereof,  he 
13     take  him  away,  and 
30    the  angels  of  God    . 


standing ; 

A 

A 

,  and  in  the  way  he 

A 

A 

shall  be 

Lord,  have  mercy  on  us, 

they 

he  sat 
make 
that  were  crying 

the  king 

A 

angels 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTLONS. 


105 


35 

and  saying,       .... 

A 

39 

the  second  is  like  unto  it, 

a  second  like  imto  it  is  this, 

40 

hang 

hangeth 

44 

make 

put 

thy  footstool 

Chapter  XXIII. 

underneath  thy  feet. 

3 

observe,  that  observe  and  do  ; 

,  these  do  and  observe : 

7 

Rabbi,  Rabbi 

Rabbi. 

8 

Master, 

teacher. 

— 

even  Christ  ;     .         .         .         . 

A 

14 

Woe  ....  damnation.     . 

A 

17 

sanctifieth        .... 

hath  sanctified 

19 

fools  and           .... 
Chapter  XXIV. 

A 

2 

And  Jesus  said 

But  he  answered  and  said 

17 

to   take   anything   out   of   his 

to  take  out  the  things  that  are 

house  : 

in  his  house  : 

18 

clothes 

cloke. 

36 

but  my  Father 

neither  the  Son,  but  the  Father 

42 

what  hour         .... 
Chapter  XXV. 

on  what  day 

6 

Cometh  ; 

A 

13 

wherein  ....  cometh.    . 

A 

15 

and  straightway  took  his  jour- 

ney  

and  he  went  on  his  journey. 

16 

Then  he  that  had     . 

Straightway  he  that 

20, 

22     beside  them 

A 

31 

holy          .         .         .  •       . 
Chapter  XXVI. 

A 

3 

and  the  scribes, 

A 

20 

he  sat  down  with  the  twelve.  . 

he  was  sitting  at  meat  with  the 
twelve  disciples. 

28 

of  the  new  testament. 

of  the  covenant. 

42 

cup  ....  from  me, 

cannot  pass  away, 

43 

he  came 

he  came  again 

— 

asleep  again ;  . 

sleeping. 

44 

he  left  them,     4        .        . 

he  left  them  again, 

io6 


APPENDIX  III. 


44 

went  away  again,      . 

•     •  1 

went  away. 

50 

wheiefore  art  thou  come  ?        .   | 

do  that  for  which  thou  art  come. 

53 

now  pray  to 

. 

beseech 

presently  give  . 

. 

even  now  send 

55 

with  you  . 

. 

A 

59 

and  elders, 

. 

A 

60 

came  two  false  witnesses, 

came  two. 

63 

answered  and  . 
Chapter  XXVII. 

.         .   1 

A 

5 

in  the  temple, 

. 

into  the  sanctuary, 

23 

the  governor  said,    . 

. 

he  said. 

35 

that  it  might  be  .  .  . 

.  lots.      . 

A 

42 

If  he  be   . 

, 

He  is 

58 

the  body  to  be  delivered. 

it  to  be  given  up. 

64 

by  night  . 
Chapter  XXVIII 

•         . 

A 

2 

from  the  door. 

• 

A 

9 

as  they  went  to   tell  his  dis- 

ciples, . 

A 

17 

him, 

. 

A 

20 

Amen. 
Chapter  I. 

MAR 

A 

K. 

2 

in  the  prophets, 

in  Isaiah  the  prophet, 

4 

John  did  baptize 

John  came,  who  baptized 

5 

they  of     .        .        . 

all  they  of 

and  were  all     . 

and  they  were 

II 

in  whom  . 

in  thee 

13 

there 

A 

14 

of  the  kingdom 

A 

16 

his  brother 

the  brother  of  Simon 

19 

thence,      . 

A 

23 

there  was 

straightway  there  was 

24 

Let  us  alone  ;  . 

A 

27 

what  thing  is  this  ? 

what  new 

doctrine  is  this  ? 

what  is  this  ?  a  new  doctrine  .? 

31 

immediately     . 

A 

SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


107 


39 


42 


7 
16 

17 

18 


he   preached    in    their    syna- 
gogues ....  and  cast  out 
as  soon  as  he  bad  spoken, 

Chapter  II. 

straightway       .... 

blasphemies  ?  . 

the  scribes  and  Pharisees 

to  repentance  .... 

And  the  disciples  of  John  and 

of  the  Pharisees 

new 

doth  burst         .... 
the  wine    is    spilled,  and  the 

bottles  will  be  marred  : 


Chapter  III. 

5     whole  as  the  other. 
15     to  heal  sicknesses,  and     . 

18  Canaanite,        .... 

29  is  in  danger  of  eternal  damna- 

tion : 

Chapter  IV. 

I  was  gathered    .... 

10  parable 

12  their  sins  .... 

15  that  was  sown  in  their  hearts, 

19  this  world,        .... 

20  some    thirtyfold,    some    sixty, 

and  some  an  hundred. 
22     which  shall  not  be  . 

30  with  what  comparison  shall  we 

compare  it  .'* 

31  is  less 

32  but  when  it  is  sown,  it  groweth 

up 

34    liis 

36     there  were  also  with  him  other 

little  ships 

yj    it  was  now  full. 


he  went  into  their    synagogues 
.  .  .  preaching  and  casting  out 
A 


he  blasphemeth  ; 

the  scribes  of  the  Pharisees 

A 

And  John's   disciples   and  the 

Pharisees 
A 

will  burst 
the    wine    perisheth,    and    the 

skins  : 


A 

A 

Cananaean, 

is  guilty  of  an  eternal  sin  : 


is  gathered 

parables. 

it 

which  hath  been  sown  in  them. 

the  world, 

thirtyfold   and    sixtyfold   and  a 

hundredfold, 
save  that  it  should  be 
in  what  parable  shall  we  set  it 

forth  ? 
though  it  be  less 

yet,  when  it  is  sown,  groweth  up 
his  own 

other  boats  were  with  him. 
the  boat  was  now  filling. 


loS 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  V. 

I 

Gadarenes. 

Gerasenes. 

3 

could  bind  him,  no,  not 

with 

could  any  more  bind  him,  no,  not 

chains : 

with  a  chain: 

1 1 

nigh  unto  the  mountains 

on  the  mountain  side 

13 

And  forthwith  Jesus 

And  he 

they  were  about 

in  number  about 

14 

the  swine 

them 

15 

and  clothed 

clothed 

22 

And,  behold,    . 

And 

23 

and  she  shall  live 

and  live 

27 

of  Jesus,  . 

the  things  concerning  Jesus, 

33 

in  her 

to  her 

36 

As  soon   as   Jesus   hear 

i  the 

i      But  Jesus,  not  heeding  (?)    the 

word  that  was  spoken, 

word  spoken, 

38 

he  Cometh 

they  come 

40 

lying. 

.      A 

42 

astonished 

amazed  straightway 

Chapter  VI. 

2     unto    him,     that     even     such 

mighty  works  are 
9     and  not  put  on 
1 1     whosoever 

—  Verily  ....  that  city. 

1 5  or  as 

16  It  is  John  ....  he    is  risen 

from  the  dead. 
20     he  did  many  things 
22     and  pleased 

—  the  king   .... 

26  sat  with  him,    . 

27  his  head  to  be  brought:  . 
36     bread :  for  they  have  nothing 

to  eat. 
39     to  make  all       . 
43    twelve  baskets  full  of  the  frag 

ments,  .... 
48    he  saw  ....  and  about  . 


unto  this  man  ?  and  what  mean 

such  mighty  works 
and,  said  he^  put  not  on 
whatsoever  place 
A 


John  ....  he  is  risen. 

he  was  much  perplexed 

she  pleased 

and  the  king 

sat  at  meat, 

to  bring  his  head: 

somewhat  to  eat. 
that  all  should 

broken  pieces,  twelve  basketfuls, 
seeing  ....  about 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


109 


51  beyond     measure,    and    won- 

dered. .... 

52  for  their  heart 

53  into  the  land  of  Gennesaret,    . 

Chapter  VII. 
I,  2     which  came  from  Jerusalem. 
And  when  they  saw  some 

—  eat 

—  they  found  fault. 
4    and  of  tables. 

8     as  the  washing  ....  ye  do.    . 

1 2  And  {the  erasure  of  this  particle 
changes  the  co7istructio7i  of 
1 1- 1 2,  and  renders  the  added 
*  he  shall  be  free '  needless 

16     If  any  man  ....  hear.  . 

19     purging  all  meats  1  . 

25     For  a  certain  woman 

—  heard  of  him,  and  came  . 

30  the    devil  gone    out,    and  her 

daughter  laid  upon  the  bed 

31  of  Tyre  and  Sidon,  he  came 
35     straightway 


but  their  heart 

to  the  land  unto  Gennesaret, 

which  had  come  from  Jerusalem, 

and  had  seen  that  some 
ate 
A 
A 
A 


A 

A 

this  he  said,  making  all  meats 

clean. 
But  straightway  a  woman 
having  heard  of  him,  came 
the  child  laid  upon  the  bed,  and 

the  devil  gone  out. 
of  Tyre,  he  came  through  Sidon 
A 


Chapter  VIII. 

I  the  multitude  being  very  great, 

9  that  had  eaten 

17  yet 

21  how  is  it  that  ye  do  not  under- 

stand .'' . 

22  he  Cometh 

24  I  see  men  as  trees, . 

25  made  him  look  up  : 

—  every  man 

26  neither  go  into  the  town, 

—  nor  tell  it ....  in  the  town. 
36  shall  it     . 


when  there  was  again  a  great 

multitude, 
A 

A 

do  ye  not  yet  understand  ? 

they  come 

I  see  men,  for  I  behold  them  as 

trees, 
he  looked  stedfastly, 
all  things 

do  not  even  enterinto  the  village. 
A 
doth  it 


no 

APPENDIX  III. 

36 

if  he  shall        .... 

to 

lose  his  own  soul  ?  . 

forfeit  his  life? 

yi 

or  what  shall    .... 

for  what  should 

soul? 

life  ? 

Chapter  IX. 

3 

as  snow ;           .... 

A 

6 

to  say  ; 

to  answer  ; 



were         .        .        .        .        . 

became 

7 

there  was          .... 

there  came 

9 

came 

were  coming 

16 

the  scribes,       .... 

them, 

23 

if  thou  canst  believe, 

if  thou  canst ! 

24 

with  tears,  Lord, 

A 

26 

was 

became 

28 

why  could  not  we  cast  him  out  ? 

we  could  not  cast  it  out. 

29 

and  fasting 

A 

31 

(x.  34)  the  third  day 

after  three  days 

33 

he  came 

they  came 

— 

among  yourselves    . 

A 

38 

and  he  followeth  not  us  ; 

A 

because  he  followeth  not 

because  he  followed  not 

44, 

46   Where  ....  quenched. 

A 

49 

and  every  sacrifice  ....  salt. 
Chapter  X. 

A 

I 

by  the  farther  side  of 

and  beyond 

6 

God  made  them  male  and  fe- 

male.   ..... 

male  and  female  made  he  them. 

8 

be 

become 

10 

the  same 

this 

12 

a  woman 

she  herself 

21 

take  up  the  cross,  and     . 

A 

29 

or  wife 

A 

46 

bUnd  Bartimasus,  the  son   of 

the  son  of  Timasus,  Bartimseus, 

Tim^us, 

a  blind  beggar, 

— 

begging.           .... 

A 

49 

commanded  him  to  be  called. 

said.  Call  ye  him. 

50 

rose 

sprang  up 

SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


Chapter  XL 


6 

commanded  :  . 

said  : 

8 

others  cut  down  branches  off 

others  branches  which  they  had 

the  trees, 

cut  from  the  fields. 



and  strawed  them  in  the  way  . 

A 

lO 

in  the  name  of  the  Lord  : 

A 

II 

and  into  the  temple  : 

into  the  temple: 

23 

those  things  which  . 

what 

whatsoever  he  saith. 

it. 

24 

ye  desire,  when  ye  pray, 

ye  pray  and  ask  for, 

26 

But  if  ...  .  your  trespasses.  . 

A 

29 

also 

Chapter  XIL 

A 

4 

and  at  him   they  cast  stones, 

and  him  they  wounded  in  the 

and   wounded   him    in    the 

head,   and    handled    shame- 

head,  and    sent    him   away 

fully. 

shamefully  handled. 

6 

Having  yet  therefore  one  son. 

his  wellbeloved,    . 

He  had  yet  one,  a  beloved  son  : 

.. 

also 

A 

17 

marvelled         .... 

marvelled  greatly 

19 

children,           .... 

child, 

21 

neither  left  he  any  seed: 

leaving  no  seed  behind  him: 

22 

had  her,  and    .... 

A 

23 

therefore,  when  they  shall  rise 

A 

25 

the  angels  which  are 

angels 

27 

but  the  God  of  the  hving  : 

but  of  the  living  : 



therefore 

A 

30 

this  is  the  first  commandment. 

A 

31 

and  the  second  is  like,  namely 

this, 

the  second  is  this  : 

32 

Well,   Master,  thou  hast  said 

Of  a  truth.   Master,  thou   hast 

the  truth  :  for  there  is  one 

well  said  that  he  is  one  ; 

God; 

33 

and  with  all  the  soul. 

A 

more 

Chapter  XIIL 

much  more 

8 

and  troubles  :  . 

A 

14 

spoken  of  by  Daniel  the  pro- 

phet,      

A 

112 


APPENDIX  III. 


i8 

your  flight        .... 

it 

22 

even 

A 

25 

the  stars  of  heaven  shall  fall,  . 

the  stars  shall  be  falling  from 
heaven. 

27 

his  angels,        .... 

the  angels, 

32 

and 

or 

34 

the  Son  of  man  is  as 
Chapter  XIV. 

it  is  as  when 

19 

and  another  said.  Is  it  I  ? 

A 

22 

eat 

A 

24 

of  the  new  testament, 

of  the  covenant, 

27 

because  of  me  this  night : 

A 

31 

the  more           .... 

A 

40 

And  when  he  returned,    . 

And  he  came  again, 

— 

asleep  again,    .... 

sleeping. 

43 

great        

A 

45 

Master,  Master; 

Rabbi  ; 

51 

the  young  men 

they 

52 

from  them         .... 

A 

65 

the    servants    did    strike   him 

the   officers  received  him  with 

with  the  palms  of  their  hands. 

blows  of  their  hands. 

70 

and  thy  speech  agreeth  thereto. 

A 

72 

And  the  second  time 
Chapter  XV. 

And  straightway  the  second  time 

3 

but  he  answered  nothing. 

A 

7 

with  him,           .... 

A 

8 

crying  aloud     .... 

went  up  and 

. — 

as  he  had  ever  done 

as  he  was  wont  to  do 

24 

when  they  had  crucified  him. 

they  parted  .... 

they  crucify  him,  and  part 

28 

And  the  ...  .  transgressors.  . 

A 

LUKE. 


Chapter  I. 

T     are  most  surely  believed  . 

28  blessed  art  thou  among  women. 

29  when  she  saw  him,  . 

35     of  thee 


have  been  fulfilled 

A 

A 

A 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


113 


37     with  God  nothing  shall  be  im- 
possible. 
42     voice,       ..... 
50    from  generation  to  generation. 
75     all  the  days  of  our  Mfe. 
78     hath  visited 

Chapter  II, 

5     Mary  his  espoused  wife 

9    behold 
12     lying 
14    good  will  towards  men. 

2 1  of  the  child, 

22  her  .... 
33     Joseph      . 

37  she  was  a  widow  of  about 

40  in  spirit    . 

42  to  Jerusalem    . 

43  Joseph  and  his  mother 

Chapter  III. 
2    Annas  and  Caiaphas  being  the 
high  priests. 

Chapter  IV. 
I     into  the  wilderness. 

4  but  by  every  word  of  God 

5  And  the  devil,  taking  him  up 

into  an  high  mountain 
8     Get  thee  behind  me,  Satan :  for 
18     to  heal  the  brokenhearted 
26     to  Sarepta,  a  city  of  Sidon, 

4 1  Thou  art  Christ  the  Son  of  God. 
43     am  I  sent 

Chapter  V. 

33    Why  do 

36    if  otherwise,  then  ....  a  rent, 

38  and  both  are  preserved.  . 

39  straightway      .... 
—    better. 


no  word  from  God  shall  be  void 

of  power, 
cry, 

unto  generations  and  generations, 
all  our  days, 
shall  visit 


Mary,  who  was  betrothed  to  him, 

A 

and  lying 

peace  among  men  in  whom  he 

is  well  pleased, 
him, 
their 

his  father 

she  had  been  a  widow  for 
A 
A 
his  parents 


in  the  high-priesthood  of  Annas 
and  Caiaphas, 

in  the  wilderness. 
A 

And  he  led  him  up  and 

A 

A 

toZarephath  in  the  land  of  Sidon, 

Thou  art  the  Son  of  God. 

was  I  sent. 


else  he  will  rend  the  new, 

A 

A 

good. 


I 


114 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  VI. 

I 

the  second  ....  first,   . 

a  Sabbath, 

lO 

whole  as  the  other   . 

A 

i6 

also 

A 

26 

so 

in  the  same  manner 

35 

hoping  for  nothing  again; 

never  despairing  (.'')  ; 

45 

evil  treasure  of  his  heart . 

evil  treasure 

48 

for  it  was  founded  upon  a  rock. 
Chapter  VII. 

because  it  had  been  well  builded 

10 

that  was  sick    .... 

A 

11 

the  day  after,  .... 

soon  afterwards, 

— 

many  of 

A 

19 

to  Jesus, 

to  the  Lord, 

28 

there  is  not  ....  the  Baptist: 

there  is  none  greater  than  John 

31 

And  the  Lord  said  . 

A 

42 

Tell  me  therefore,  which  of  them 

Which  of  them  therefore 

44 

with  the  hairs  of  her  head. 
Chapter  VIII. 

with  her  hair. 

3     unto  him 

20    by  certain  which  said 

26, 37   Gadarenes   .... 

27     long  time,  and 

34  and  went 

40    it  came  to  pass,  that,  when  Jesus 

was  returned, 
45     and  sayest  thou.  Who  touched 

me  ? 

48     be  of  good  comfort  . 
54    put  them  all  out,  and 

Chapter  IX. 

I     his  twelve  disciples, 

3     staves, 

7     by  him 

10  went  aside  privately  into  a 
desert  place  belonging  to  the 
city  called  Bethsaida. 

35  my  beloved  Son: 


unto  them 

A 

Gerasenes 

and  for  a  long  time 

A 

as  Jesus  returned, 

A 
A 
A 


the  twelve, 

staff, 
A 

withdrew  apart  to  a  city  called 
Bethsaida. 

my  Son,  my  chosen: 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


115 


38 

look 

to  look 

48 

shall  be  great.           .         .        , 

is  great. 

so 

not  against  us  is  for  us.    . 

not  against  you  is  for  you. 

54 

even  as  Elias  did     . 

A 

55, 

56  and  said  ....  to  save  them 

A 

57 

it  came  to  pass 

A 

Lord 

Chapter  X. 

A 

I 

also 

A 

II 

on  us 

to  our  feet 

— 

unto  you 

A 

15 

which  art          .... 

shalt  thou  be 

thrust  down  to  hell. 

brought  down  to  Hades. 

20 

rather 

A 

21 

in  the  spirit,     .... 

in  the  Holy  Spirit, 

3^- 

when  he  was  at  the  place,  came 

when  he  came  to  the  place, 

35 

when  he  departed    . 

A 

3« 

it  came  to  pass 
Chapter  XI. 

A 

2 

Our  Father  which  art  in  heaven, 

Father, 

— 

Thy  will  ....  heaven.    . 

A 

4 

lead 

bring 

— . 

but  deliver  us  from  evil    . 

A 

29 

the  prophet      .... 

A 

ZZ 

secret  place,     .... 

cellar, 

44 

scribes  ....  hypocrites 

A 

53 

as  he  said  these  things  unto 

when  he  was   come   out  1 

them. 

thence, 

54 

that  they  might  accuse  him.    . 
Chapter  XII. 

A 

18 

fruits 

corn 

31 

all 

A 

56 

do  not  discern 
Chapter  XIII. 

know  not  how  to  interpret 

9 

well :  and  if  not,  then  after  that 

thenceforth,  well-,    but   if 

thou  shalt  cut  it  down. 

thou  shalt  cut  it  down. 

15 

thou  hypocrite, 

ye  hypocrites, 

not, 


ii6 


APPENDIX  III. 


19 
25 
31 

35 

great 

Lord,  Lord 

The  same  day 

verily 

the  time  come  when 

Chapter  XIV. 

A 

Lord 

In  that  very  hour 

A 

A 

3 
10 

on  the  sabbath  day  ? 
of  them    . 

Chapter  XV. 

• 

on  the  sabbath,  or  not } 
of  all 

16 
21 

22 

filled  his  belly  . 
make  me  as  one  of 

servants. 
Bring  forth 

Chapter  XVI. 

thy  hired 

been  filled 

A 

Bring  forth  quickly 

9 

when  ye  fail,    . 

, 

1  when  it  shall  fail, 

Chapter  XVII. 

9  I  trow  not. 

18  There  are  not  found 

21  lo  there  !  . 

23  See  here  ;  or,  see  there  : 

36  two  men  shall  be  ...  .  left. 


Were  there  none  found 

there  ! 

lo  there,  or  lo  here  ! 

A 


Chapter  XVIII. 
7     though  he  bear  long  with  them  "i 


and    he   is  longsuffering    over 
them  1 


Chapter  XIX. 

42  If  thou  hadst  known,  even  thou, 
at  least  in  this  thy  day,  the 
things  which  belong  unto  thy 
peace  ! 

45  therein,  and  them  that  bought 

46  my  house  is      ...        . 


if  thou  hadst  known  in  this  day, 
even  thou,  the  things  which 
belong  unto  peace  ! 


my  house  shall  be 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


17 


Chapter  XX. 

1 3  when  they  see  him  . 

14  come 

23     Why  tempt  ye  me  ? 

30  and  the  second  ....  childless 

31  the  seven  also  :  and  they  left  . 
33  last  of  all  .  .  .  . 
33  is  she  ? 

Chapter  XXI. 

4    unto  the  offerings  of  God 
1 1     in  divers  places,  and  famines  . 
25     with  perplexity  ;   the  sea  and 
the  waves  roaring ; 

Chapter  XXII. 

31  And  the  Lord  said,  . 

61  crow,        .... 

62  Peter        .... 
64  they  struck  him  on  the  face 
68  me,  nor  let  me  go  ; . 

Chapter  XXIII. 

6  of  Galilee, 

17  For  of ...  .  feast.  . 

23  and  of  the  chief  priests    . 

38  in  letters  of  Greek,  and  Latin 

and  Hebrew, 

39  If  thou  be  Christ,     . 

42  And  he  said  unto  Jesus,  Lord 

—  into  thy  kingdom.    . 

45  And  the  sun  was  darkened, 

54  that  day  was  the  preparation, 

Chapter  XXIV. 

I     and  certain  others  with  them  . 
10    ,  and  other  women   that  were 

with  them,  which  told 
17     and  are  sad  ?  . 
42     and  of  an  honeycomb. 


A 
A 

A 

and  the  second  : 

the  seven  also  left 

afterward 

shall  she  be  '^. 


unto  the  gifts 

and  famines  in  divers  places 
in  perplexity  for  the  roaring  of 
the  sea  and  the  billows  ; 


A 


crow  this  day, 

he 

A 

A 


It, 
A 
A 


Art  not  thou  the  Christ  ? 

And  he  said,  Jesus, 

in  thy  kingdom. 

the  sun's  light  failing: 

it  was  the  day  of  the  Preparation, 


:    and   the    other  women   with 

them  told 
And  they  stood  still,  looking  sad. 
A 


iiS 

APPENDIX  III. 

46 

Thus  it  is  written,  and  thus  it  ,    Thusit  is  written,  that  the  Christ 

behoved  Christ  to  suffer, 

should  suffer, 

49 

of  Jerusalem,    .... 

A 

53 

praising  and     .... 

A 

— 

Amen 

A 

JOHN. 


Chapter  I. 

27  .  He  it   is,  who  coming  after 

me  is  preferred  before  me, 

29  John 

42  of Jona  :  . 

43  and  saith 
49  and  saith  unto 
51  Hereafter 


,  even  he  that  cometh  after  me 

he 

of  John : 

and  Jesus  saith 

A 

A 


Chapter  III. 

15     in  him  should  not  perish,  but  . 

25     the  Jews 

32     And  what        .... 


may  in  him 
a  Jew 
What 


Chapter  IV. 

15 

hither 

all  the  way  hither 

17 

said 

said  unto  him 

42 

the  Christ,       .... 

A 

43 

and  went          .... 

A 

51 

and  told  him    .... 

A 

Thy  son  liveth.         .         .         . 
Chapter  V. 

that  his  son  lived. 
• 

3 

great        

A 

4, 

5  waiting  for  ...  .  disease  he 

had 

A 

5 

an  infirmity  thirty  and   eight 

been  thirty  and  eight  years  in 

years. 

his  infirmity. 

16 

and  sought  to  slay  him,  . 

A 

27 

also,          

A 

30 

of  the  Father .... 

of  him 

SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


119 


Chapter  VI. 
II     to  the  disciples,  and  the  dis 

ciples    .... 
17     was  not  come  . 
22     when        .... 

—  save  that  one  . 

—  whereinto   his   disciples   were 

.entered 
51     which  I  will  give 
58    as  your  fathers  did  eat  manna 
65     my  Father, 
69    that  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  living 

God 

71     Iscariot  the  son  of  Simon 

Chapter  VII. 
10    gone  up,  then  went  he  also  up 

unto  the  feast, 
20    and  said, 
26    the  very  Christ  1 

39  the  Holy  Ghost 

40  this  saying, 
46     spake  like  this  man, 
50     by  night  . 
53     (to  viii.  11) 


Chapter  VIII. 
6     as  though  he  heard  them  not  . 
9    being  convicted  by  their  own 
conscience,  . 

—  standing  .... 

10  and  saw  none  but  the  woman 

—  those  thine  accusers  .'* 

1 1  sin  no  more.     . 

29     the  Father  hath  not 

38     which  ye  have  seen  with  your 

father 

44    abode  not 

59     going   through    the    midst   of 

them,  and  so  passed  by. 


had  not  yet  come 

A 

save  one, 

A 

A 

as  the  fathers  did  eat, 

the  Father. 

the  Holy  One  of  God. 
the  son  of  Simon  Iscariot, 


gone  up  unto  the  feast,  then  went 
he  also  up, 

A 

the  Christ .? 

the  Spirit 

these  words, 

so  spake. 

A 

(omitted  by  most  ancient  au- 
thorities, and  varied  by  others  : 
in  R.  V.  printed  within 
brackets) 


,  where  she  was, 

A 

they  ? 

from  henceforth  sin  no  more. 

he  hath  not 

which  ye  heard  from  your  father, 
stood  not 


A 


I20 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  IX. 

6    the  eyes  of  the  blind  man 

8  bhnd, 

9  He  is  like  him. 

1 1  the  pool  of       ...         . 

Chapter  X. 

12  scattereth  the  sheep  : 

13  the  hirehng      .         .         .         . 
26     as  I  said  unto  you.  . 

38    and  believe      .... 

Chapter  XI. 

22     But  I  know      .        .        .        . 
31     saying,  She  goeth    . 
41     from  the  place  where  the  dead 
was  laid 


his  eyes 

a  beggar, 

No,  but  he  is  like  him. 

A 


scattereth  them  ; 

he 

A 

and  understand 


And  even  now  I  know 
supposing  that  she  was  goim 


Chapter  XII. 

I  which  had  been  dead, 

4  Simon's  son,     . 

7  Let  her  alone  : 

—  hath  she  kept  this    . 

47  and  believe  not, 

Chapter  XIII. 


24  that    he    should   ask   who    it 

should  be  of  whom  he  spake. 

25  He  then  lying  .... 
32     if  God  be  glorified  in  him. 

Chapter  XIV. 

5     ye  know,  and  the  way  ye  know. 
28    because  I  said,  I  go 

Chapter  XV. 
1 1     that  my  joy  might  remain 


A 
A 

Suffer  her  to  keep  it : 

(Omit) 

and  keep  them  not, 


and  saith  unto  him.  Tell  us  who 

it  is  of  whom  he  speaketh. 
He  leaning  back,  as  he  was, 

A 


the  way  ye  know, 
because  I  go 


that  my  joy  may  be 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


121 


Chapter  XVI. 

lo     My  Father,      .... 

1 6  because  I  go  to  the  Father.     . 

23  inmy  name,  He  will  give  it  you. 
33    ye  shall  have   .... 

Chapter  XVII. 

4  I  have      

1 2  in  the  world     . 

17  through  thy  truth:   . 
21  one  in  us: 

24  I  will  that  they  also,  whom  thou 

hast  given  me,  be  with  me 
where  I  am  : 


the  Father, 

A 

,  He  will  give  it  you  in  my  name. 

ye  have 


having 

A 

in  the  truth: 

in  us: 

that  which  thou  hast  given  me, 
I  will  that,  where  I  am,  they 
also  may  be  with  me  ; 


Chapter  XVIII. 


20 

the  Jews  always 

all  the  Jews 

40 

all 

Chapter  XIX. 

A 

3 

and  said,          ... 

and  they  came  unto  him  and  said, 

7 

by  our  law        .... 
Chapter  XX. 

by  that  law 

16 

saith  unto  him, 

saith  unto  him  in  Hebrew, 

29 

Thomas 

Chapter  XXI. 

A 

2S 

Amen 

1  A 

Chapter  I. 

14  and  supplication 

15  of  the  disciples, 
19    proper 

25     take  part  of     . 


ACTS. 


of  the  brethren, 


take  the  place  in 


122 


APPENDIX  III. 


I 

7 
30 


31 
33 
41 
47 


Chapter  II. 

with  one  accord 

one  to  another 

according  to  the  flesh,  he  would 

raise  up  Christ  to  sit  on  his 

throne  ; 
that  his  soul  was  not  left  in  hell, 

now 

gladly       ..... 
And   the   Lord   added  to   the 

church  daily  such  as  should 

be  saved. 


together 
A 

he   would    set    one    upon     his 
throne  ; 

that  neither  was  he  left  in  Hades, 

A 

A 

And  the  Lord  added  to  them  day 

by  day  those  that  were  being 

saved. 


Chapter  II L 


3 

asked 

asked  to  receive 

6 

rise  up  and  walk.     . 

walk. 

II 

the  lame  man  which  was  healed 

he 

18 

Christ 

his  Christ 

20 

he   shall    send    Jesus    Christ, 

that  he  may  send  the  Christ  who 

which  before  was  preached 

hath  been  appointed  for  you. 

unto  you : 

even  Jesus: 

22 

unto  the  fathers 

A 

— 

the  Lord  your  God  . 

the  Lord  God 

25 

our  fathers,       .... 

your  fathers. 

26 

his  Son  Jesus  .... 
Chapter  IV. 

his  Servant, 

17 

straitly 

A 

24 

thou  art  God,  .... 

A 

25 

who  by  the  mouth  of  thy  servant 

who  by  the  Holy  Ghost,  by  the 

David  hast  said, 

mouth  of    our  father    David 
thy  servant,  didst  say. 

27 

of  a  truth          .... 

of  a  truth  in  this  city 

child 

Servant 

Chapter  V. 

5 

these  things 

it. 

24 

the  high  priest  and  . 

A 

28 

Did  not  we  straitly  command 

We  straitly  charged 

32 

his  witnesses    .... 

witnesses 

SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


33     took  counsel    . 

. 

were  minded 

34    the  apostles      . 

. 

the  men 

37     much  people    . 

. 

some  of  the  people 

39     overthrow  it  ;  . 

overthrow  them ; 

42     Jesus  Christ.    . 

• 

Jesus  as  the  Christ. 

Chapter  VI. 

3    of  the  Holy  Ghost  . 

. 

of  the  Spirit 

8     of  faith     .... 

. 

of  grace 

13     blasphemous    . 

• 

A 

Chapter  VII. 

17     had  sworn  to    . 

vouchsafed  unto 

18     king          .... 

king  over  Egypt, 

30    of  the  Lord 

A 

32     and  the  God  of  Isaac,  an 

dthe 

God  of  Jacob. 

and  of  Isaac,  and  of  Jacob. 

35     did  God  send  . 

hath  God  sent 

yj     the  Lord  your  God 

God 

—    him  shall  ye  hear.    . 

A 

43     Remphan, 

Rephan, 

Chapter  VIII. 

7     {text  corrupt) 

. 

{reading  and  version  doubtful)  * 

10    the  great  power  of  God. 

• 

that  power  of    God   which    is 
called  great. 

13     beholding    the    miracles 

and 

beholding  signs  and  great  mira- 

signs which  were  done 

cles  wrought. 

22     God, 

. 

the  Lord, 

37     And  PhiHp  ....  Son  of  God. 

A 

Chapter  IX. 

5     the  Lord  .... 

• 

he 

5-6     it  is  hard  ....  said  unto  him, 

A 

6    Arise 

But  rise 

8     no  man  : . 

nothing  : 

12     in  a  vision 

A 

—     hand 

hands 

18     forthwith, 

A 

1  viii.  7.     The  readings  now  received  afford  no  construction. 
supplied  after  aKaOapra,  the  verse  might  be  construed. 


Were  the  rel.  « 


124 


APPENDIX  III. 


19, 

26     Saul 

he 

20 

Christ 

Jesus 

21 

came 

he  had  come 

25 

the  disciples     .... 

his  disciples 

31 

the  churches    .... 

the  church 

and  were           .... 

being 

— 

were  multiplied. 

was  multiplied. 

Z^ 

desiring  him  that  he  would  not 

intreating  him,   Delay    not    to 

delay  to  come  unto  them. 

come  unto  us. 

Chapter  X. 

6 

he  shall ....  to  do. 

A 

7 

Cornelius          .... 

him 

II 

unto  him,          .... 

A 

— 

knit   at  the  four  corners,  and 

let  down  to  . 

let  down  by  four  corners  upon 

16 

again 

straightway 

21 

which  were  ....  Cornelius  ;  . 

A 

23 

Peter 

he  arose  and 

30 

I  was  fasting  until  this  hour ; 

until  this  hour,  I  was  keeping 

and    at    the    ninth    hour    I 

the  ninth  hour  of  prayer  in 

prayed  in  my  house, 

my  house, 

32 

who,  when   he   cometh,    shall 

speak  unto  thee.  . 

A 

33 

of  God 

of  the  Lord. 

48 

the  Lord 

Chapter  XL 

Jesus  Christ. 

II 

where  I  was,    .... 

in  which  we  were. 

12 

nothing  doubting.    . 

making  no  distinction. 

21 

believed,  and  .... 

that  believed 

22 

that  he  should  go     . 

A 

25 

Barnabas          .... 

he 

28 

Csesar 

A 

Chapter  XII I. 
19,  20  he  divided  their  land  to 
them  by  lot.  And  after  that 
he  gave  unto  them  judges 
about  the  space  of  four  hun- 
dred and  fifty  years, 


he  gave  them  their  land  for  an 
inheritance,  for  about  four 
hundred  and  fifty  years  :  and 
after  these  things  he  gave 
them  judges, 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


125 


23     raised 

2i'},     unto  us  their  children, 

35     Wherefore        .... 

42     And  when  the  Jews  were  gone 

out    of  the   synagogue,  the 

Gentiles  besought 


brought 

unto  our  children. 
Because 

And  as  they  went  out,  they  be- 
sought 


Chapter  XIV. 
28    there 


Chapter  XV. 

II     Christ 

17-18  who  doeth  all  these  things. 
Known  unto  God  are  all  his 
works   .... 

23  letters  after  this  manner  ; 

24  saying  ....  law  :    . 
ZZ    unto  the  apostles.     . 


34     Notwithstanding  .  . 
yj    determined 
40    of  God.    . 


still. 


who  maketh  these  things  known 

thus 

A 

unto  those  that  had  sent  them 

forth. 
A 

was  minded 
of  the  Lord. 


Chapter  XVI. 

7  the  Spirit         .... 

10  the  Lord  .... 

13  out  of  the  city 

—  where  prayer  was  wont  to  be 
made  ; 

16  to  prayer,         .... 

17  unto  us 

31  Christ, 


the  Spirit  of  Jesus 

God 

without  the  gate 

where  we  supposed  there  was  a 

place  of  prayer ; 
to  the  place  of  prayer, 
unto  you 
A 


Chapter  XVII. 

5     which  believed  not, 
13     and  stirred  up 
26    blood 


stirring  up  and  troubling 
A 


126 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  XVIII. 
I     Paul 

5     was  pressed  in  the  spirit, 
7     Justus, 

21  bade  them  farewell,  saying, 

—     I    must    by   all  means  .... 
Jerusalem  :  but     . 

22  and  he  sailed  ... 
25     the  things  of  the  Lord,     . 

Chapter  XIX. 
I  -2     and  finding  certain  disciples 

he  said  unto  them, 
Christ  Jesus.     . 
one  Tyrannus. 
Jesus, 
We  adjure 
overcame  them, 
and   her  magnificence   should 

be  destroyed, 

goddess 

there  being  no  cause  whereby 

we  may  give  an  account  of 

this  concourse. 


Chapter  XX. 
the  disciples     .... 

they 

and  tarried  at  Trogyllium  ; 
But  none  of  these  things  move 

me,  neither  count  I  my  life 

dear  unto  myself, 

with  joy, 

of  God, 

Chapter  XXI. 


4 

9 

10 

13 
16 


35 
40 


15 

24 


25 


he 

was  constrained  by  the  word, 
Titus  Justus, 

taking  his  leave  of  them,  and 
saying, 

A 

,  he  set  sail 

the  things  concerning  Jesus, 

and  found  certain  disciples  : 
and  he  said  unto  them, 

Jesus. 

Tyrannus. 

A 

I  adjure 

mastered  both  of  them, 

and  that  she  should  even  be  de- 
posed from  her  magnificence, 

A 

there  being  no  cause  for  it ; 
and  as  touching  it  we  shall 
not  be  able  to  give  account  of 
I       this  concourse. 


we 
we 
A 

But  I  hold  not  my  life  of  any 
account  as  dear  unto  myself, 


4    go  up  to   . 

5-6     and  prayed.     And 

8     that  were  of  Paul's  company 


set  foot  in 

we  prayed,  and 

A 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


127 


16 

20 
30 


20 
30 


34 


the  multitude  must  needs  come 
together:       .         .         .         . 

and  concluded  that  they  ob- 
serve no  such  thing,  save 
only  that  they  keep 

Chapter  XXII. 
the  name  of  the  Lord, 
to  his  death,     .... 
from  his  bands, 
to  appear,         .... 

Cha-pter   XXIII. 
but  if  ....  to  him, 
let  us  not  fight  against  God.    . 
they  would        .... 
that  the  Jews  laid  wait  for  the 
man, 

farewell 

the  governor  ....  the  letter, . 


Chapter  XXIV. 

1  the  elders 

2  very  worthy  deeds  are  done 
6-8     and      would     have  .  .  . 

unto  thee 
10    the  more  cheerfully . 
14    which  are  written  in  the  law 

and  in  the  prophets. 

18     Whereupon  certain  Jews  from 

Asia 

• —    nor  with  tumult 

Chapter  XXV. 
2     the  high  priest 
5     any  wickedness 

8    he 

16    dehver  any  man  to  die     . 
20    because    I    doubted    of    such 
manner  of  questions, 


giving  judgment  that  they  should 
keep 


his  name. 

A 

A 

to  come  together, 


and  what  if  .  . 

A 

thou  wouldest 


.  .  to  him? 


I  that  there  would  be  a  plot  against 
I       the  man, 

I  he  .  „  .  .  it. 


certain  elders 
evils  are  corrected 

A 

cheerfully 

which  are  according  to  the  law 

and  which  are  written  in  the 

prophets. 

amidst  which  they 
nor  yet  with  tumult  ;  but  there 
were  certain  Jews  from  Asia — 


the  chief  priests 
any  thing  amiss 
Paul 

give  up  any  man 
being  perplexed  how  to  inquire 
concerning  these  things, 


28 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  XXVI. 

28  Almost  thou  persuadest  me  to 

be  a  Christian. 

29  that  not  only  thou,  but  also  all 

that  hear  me  this  day,  were 
both  almost,  and  altogether 


with  but  little  persuasion  thou 

wouldest    fain    make    me    a 

Christian, 
that  whether  with  little  or  with 

much,    not    thou    only,    but 

....  might  become 


[Reddendum  puto : 


I  would  pray  to  God,  whether  with  little  prayer  or  with  much, 
that  not'  &C.1 


Chapter  XXVII. 

14    Euroclydon.     . 

19    we  ...  .  our  own    . 

Chapter  XXVIII. 

I  they  ....  they 

16  the  centurion  ....  but  . 

25  our  

29  And  when  .  .  .  with  themselves 

30  Paul         .... 


Euraquilo. 
they 


we  . 

A 

your 

A 

he 


.  their  own 


Chapter  I. 

16  of  Christ : 

24  also . 

29  fornication, 

31  implacable. 


ROMANS. 


Chapter  II. 
17    behold,    . 


.  I  but  if 


Chapter  III. 

7    For  if 

22     and  upon  all    . 
30    seeing    it  is  one    God  which 
shall  justify 


But  if 
A 

if  so  be  that  God  is  one,  and  he 
shall  justify 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTLONS. 


T29 


I 
II 

19 


Chapter  IV. 
our  father 
also : 

for  where 
he  considered  not 
neither  yet 

Chapter  V. 
we  have   . 


our  forefather 

A 

but  where 

he  considered 

and 


.   j  let  us  have 


Chapter  VI. 

1 1  our  Lord 

12  it  in 

Chapter  VII. 
6     that   being   dead   wherein  we 
were  held;    .... 
18     I  find  not 

Chapter  VIII. 
I     who  walk  ....  spirit.     . 

II     Christ 

20-21  who  hath  subjected  the  same 

in  hope,  because  the  creature 

itself  also 
24     for  what  a  man  seeih,  why  doth 

h6  yet  hope  for  t 
26     infirmities 
34    that  condemneth  t 
-^     Christ       . 

—  that  is  risen  again 

—  even 

Chapter  IX. 
28     For  he upon  the  earth. 


31  hath  not  attained  to  the  law  of 

righteousness. 

32  by  the  works  of  the  law. 

—     For 

33  whosoever        .... 


having  died  to  that  wherein  we 

were  holden ; 
is  not. 


A 

Christ  Jesus 

who  subjected  it,  in  hope  that 
the  creation  itself  also 

for  who  hopeth  for  that  which 

he  seeth  ? 
infirmity 

that  shall  condemn  ? 
Christ  Jesus 

that  was  raised  from  the  dead 
A 


For  the  Lord  will  execute  his 
work  upon  the  earth,  finishing 
it  and  cutting  it  short. 

did  not  arrive  at  that  law. 

by  works. 

A 

he  that 


K 


I30 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  X. 


I 

for  Israel          .... 

for  them 

5 

For  Moses  describeth  the  right- 

For Moses  writeth  that  the  man 

eousness  which  is  of  the  law, 

that  doeth  the  righteousness 

That  the   man  which  doeth 

which  is  of  the  law  shall  live 

those  things   shall    live   by 

thereby. 

them. 

15 

that  preach  the  gospel  of  peace, 

and 

A 

17 

of  God 

Chapter  XI. 

of  Christ 

6 

But  if  ...  .  work. 

A 

13 

For 

But 

17 

root  and  fatness 

root  of  the  fatness 

19 

The  branches  .... 

Branches 

21 

take  heed  lest   he  also  spare 

not  thee 

neither  will  he  spare  thee. 

22 

thee,  goodness, 

thee,  God's  goodness, 

31 

may  obtain       .... 
Chapter  XII. 

may  now  obtain 

20 

Therefore  if    . 
Chapter  XIII. 

1   But  if 

3 

good  works,      .... 

the  good  work, 

9 

Thou  shalt  not  bear  false  wit- 

ness       

A 

II 

for  us 

Chapter  XIV. 

for  you 

4 

God 

the  Lord 

6 

and  he  that  .  .  .  regard  it. 

A 

— 

He  that  eateth 

and  he  that  eateth, 

9 

and  rose,  and  revived,     . 

and  lived  again. 

10 

of  Christ 

of  God 

21 

or  is  offended,  or  is  made  weak. 

A 

22 

Hast  thou  faith 

The  faith  which  thou  hast, 

SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORI^ECTIONS. 


131 


Chapter  XV. 


7 
8 

15 

16 

17 


Now  1  say  that  Jesus  Christ  . 
brethren,  ,         .         .         . 

of  Jesus  Christ 
whereof  I  may  glory  through 

Jesus  Christ 
of  any  of  those  things  which 

Christ  hath  not  wrought  by 

me, 
in  the  power  of  the  Spirit  of 


you 

For  I  say  that  Christ 

A 

of  Christ  Jesus 

my  glorying  in  Christ  Jesus 
of  any  things  save  those  wh'ch 
Christ  wrought  through  me, 


God;    . 

. 

. 

in  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost ; 

24 

I  will  come  to  you  ; 

. 

A 

29 

of  the  gospel  . 
Chapter  XVL 

• 

A 

3 

Priscilla  . 

. 

Prisca 

5 

of  Achaia 

of  Asia 

6 

on  us. 

on  you. 

8 

Amplias  . 

Ampliatus 

t6 

The  churches  . 

All  the  churches 

18 

Jesus 

A 

24 

The  grace  .  .  .  .  Ar 

nen. 

A 

27 

be  the  glory     . 

[to  whom]  be  the  glory 

I  CORINT 

HIANS. 

Chapter  I. 

15 

I  had  baptized 

• 

ye  were  baptized 

20 

this  world  1 

the  world .? 

22 

a  sign,      . 

signs, 

23 

unto  the  Greeks 

unto  Gentiles 

26 

ye  see 

behold 

29 

in  his  presence. 

before  God. 

30 

of  God  is  made  unto  i 
Chapter  II. 

as  wisdom, 

was  made  unto  us  wisdom  from 
God, 

I 

testimony 

. 

mystery 

4 

of  man's  wisdom,     . 

. 

of  wisdom, 

7 

the  world 

•  1 

the  worlds 

K  2 


132 


13 


4 
7 

20 


APPENDIX  III. 


Eye 

the  things  which 
the  Holy  Ghost 

Chapter  III. 

and  divisions,  .... 
carnal  ?     . 

Who  then  is  Paul,  and  who  is 
Apollos,  but  ministers 

Chapter  IV. 

Moreover         .         .        .         . 
to  think  of  men  above 

Chapter  V. 

commonly 

is  not  so  much  as  named 


as     . 

Jesus  Christ  (2 

for  us  : 

Therefore 

Chapter  VI. 

set  them 

Now  therefore  there  is  utterly 

a  fault  among  you, 
and  in  your  spirit,  which  are 

God's 


Things  which  eye 
Whatsoever  things 
the  Spirit 


A 

men  } 

What  then  is  Apollos,  and  what 
is  Paul  ?     Ministers, 


Here  moreover 
to  go  beyond 


actually 

is  not  even 

A 

Jesus 

A 

A 


do  ye  set  them 

Nay,  already  it  is  altogether  a 
defect  in  you, 


Chapter  VII. 

3     due  benevolence  : 
5     fasting  and 


II 


Chapter  VIII. 

other        

with   conscience   of    the    idol 

unto   this  hour  eat  it  as  a 

thing 
through   thy  knowledge   shall 

the  weak  brother  perish, 


her  due 
A- 


being  used  until  now  to  the  idol, 
eat  as  of  a  thing 

through  thy  knowledge  he  that 
is  weak  perisheth,  the  brother 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS, 


^33 


Chapter  IX. 


I 

Am   I  not  an   apostle?  am  I 

Am  I   not  free  1  am   I   not   an 

not  free  ? 

apostle .? 

— 

Christ      ..... 

A 

lO 

he  that  ploweth  should  ploiv  in 

because   he  that  ploweth  ought 

hope  ;  and  he  that  thresheth 

to  plow  in  hope  ;  and  he  that 

in  hope  should  be  partaker 

thtesheth  to  tliresh  in  hope  of 

of  his  hope. 

partaking. 

i8 

of  Christ           .... 

A 

20 

as  under  the  law 

as  under  the  law,  not  being  my- 
self under  the  law, 

22 

as     .....        - 

A 

23 

this  I  do  . 
Chapter  X, 

I  do  all  things 

I 

Moreover         .... 

For 

9 

Christ,      ..... 

the  Lord, 

9, 

10     also    ..... 

A 

19 

that  the  idol  is  any  thing,  or 

that  a  thing  sacrificed  to  idols  is 

that    which    is     offered    in 

anything,  or  that  an  idol  is 

sacrifice  to  idols  is  any  thing.? 

anything  ? 

^3 

for  me  (2)         .... 

A 

28 

unto  idols,        .... 
for  the  earth  is  the  Lord's,  and 

A 

the  fulness  thereof: 

A 

Chapter  XI. 

2 

brethren,          .... 

A 

24 

Take,  eat :        ,        .        .        . 

A 

— 

broken     ..... 

A 

26 

this  cup    ..... 

the  cup 

29 

unworthily        .... 

A 

— 

not  discerning  the  Lord's  body. 

if  he  discern  not  the  body. 

31 

For  if  we  would  judge  ourselves, 

But  if  we  discerned  ourselves, 

34 

And  if 

Chapter  XI L 

If 

2 

ye  were  Gentiles,     . 

when  ye  were  Gentiles, 

— 

carried  away    .... 

ye  were  led  away 

3 

calleth  Jesus  accursed  ;    . 

saith  Jesus  is  anathema  ; 

that  Jesus  is  the  Lord,     . 

Jesus  is  Lord, 

134 


APPENDIX  III. 


8 

knowledge  by  . 

knowledge  according  to 

9 

healing  by  the  same  Spirit ;     . 

heahng  in  the  one  Spirit ; 

12 

of  that  one  body, 

of  the  body, 

13 

into  one  Spirit. 

of  one  Spirit. 

i5> 

16     is   it  therefore  not  of  the 

it  is   not  therefore  not   of  the 

body? 

body. 

30 

best           ..... 
Chapter  XIV. 

greater 

18 

my  God, 

God, 

25 

and  thus 

A 

34 

your  women     .... 

the  women 

— 

they  are  commanded  to  be 

let  them  be 

35 

women      ..... 

a  woman 

Zl 

commandments 
Chapter  XV. 

commandment 

20 

and  become     .... 

A 

29 

for  the  dead  (second) 

for  them 

32 

what  advantageth  it  me,  if  the 

what  doth  it  profit  me.^  if  the 

dead  rise  not  ?  let  us 

dead  are  not  raised,  let  us 

44 

there  is 

if  ihere  is 

47 

the  Lord           .... 

A 

55 

0  death,  where  is  thy  sting  ?  O 

0  death,  where  is  thy  victory  ? 

grave,  where  is  thy  victory  ? 

0  death,  where  is  thy  sting  ? 

Chapter  XVI. 

22 

Jesus  Christ     .... 

A    • 



Anathema  Maran-atha.    . 

anathema.     Maran  atha. 

2  CORINTHIANS. 


10 
12 
14 


Chapter 
which  is  .  . 


doth  deliver 
simplicity 
the  Lord 


.  salvation. 


or  whether  we  be  comforted,  it 
is  for  your  comfort,  which 
worketh  in  the  patient  en- 
during of  the  same  sufferings 
which  we  also  suffer: 

will  deliver  : 

holiness 

our  Lord 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


135 


18     was  not 

20    all  the  promises  of  God  in  him 
are  yea,  and  in  him  Amen, 


is  not 

how  many  soever  be  the  promises 
of  God,  in  him  is  the  yea  : 
wherefore  also  through  him  is 
the  Amen, 


Chapter  II. 

5     me,  but  in  part  :  that  I  may 
not  overcharge  you  all. 


not  to  me,  but  in  part  (that  I 
press  not  too  heavily)  to  you 
all. 


3 

10 


Chapter  III. 

in  fleshy  tables  of  the  heart. 
For  even 


in  tables  that  are  hearts  of  flesh. 
For  verily 


10 
14 


Chapter  IV. 

who  commanded  the  light  to 

shine 

the  Lord           .... 
by 


that  said,  Light  shall  shine 

A 

with 


Chapter  V. 

5  whp  also  hath  given 

12  for   . 

14  if  one 

17  all  things 

18  Jesus 
21  For. 


who  gave 

A 

one 

they 

A 

A 


Chapter  VI. 
16    ye  are 


.   I  we  are 


Chapter  VII. 

12  our  care  for  you 

13  Therefore  we  were  comforted 

in  your  comfort  :  yea,  and 
16     therefore  .         .        .         . 


your  earnest  care  for  us 
Therefore  we  have  been  com- 
forted :  and  in  our  comfort 
A 


136 


APPENDIX  III. 


Chapter  VIII. 

4    that  we  would  receive  the  gift, 
and  take  upon  us 
4-5     saints.     And  this  they  did,     . 

19  with  this  grace, 

—  same 

—  and  ....  of  your  ready  mind  : 

20  no  man     ..... 

21  providing  .         .         .         . 

Chapter  IX. 

4    this  same  confident  boasting.  . 

10  both  minister  .... 

Chapter  X. 

7  do  ye  look        .... 

8  somewhat  more 

Chapter  XI. 

I  a  little  in  my  folly  : . 

3  so 

—  simpHcity     .  ... 

6  we  have  been  throughly  made 

manifest  among  you 

31  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,     . 

-^1  desirous  to  apprehend  me  : 

Chapter  XII. 

I     It  is   not    expedient    for    me 
doubtless  to  glory. 

7  {Probably  coiTicpt.    See  note}) 

1 1  in  glorying        .... 
15     though  the  more  abundantly  I 

love  you,  the  less  I  be  loved. 

19  Again,  think  ye        .         .         . 

20  debates,  envyings,  . 

—  strifes, 


If  I  love  you  more  abundantly, 

am  I  loved  the  less  } 
Ye  think  all  this  time 
strife,  jealousy, 
factions, 

*  In  xii.  7  very  ancient  corruption  seems  to  lurk.  The  5i6  (wherefore), 
which  interrupts  the  construction,  is  supported  by  preponderant  authority  of 
mss.,  but  is  found  in  one  version  only.  The  repetition  of  the  clause  'iva  /xr] 
vTrepaipw/xai  has  strong  support  in  mss.,  but  not  so  large  as  did  has. 


in  regard  of  this  grace  and 

saints  :  and  this, 

in  the  matter  of  this  grace, 

A 

and  to  shew  our  readiness  : 

any  man 

for  we  take  thousrht 


this  confidence, 
shall  supply 


ye  look 

somewhat  abundantly 


in  a  little  foolishness  : 

A 

simpHcity  and  purity 

we  have  made  it  manifest  among 

ail  men  to  you-ward 
the  Lord  Jesus, 
in  order  to  take  me  : 


I  must  needs  glory,  though  it  is 
not  expedient ;  but 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


^Z7 


Chapter  XIII. 

2 

I  write      .... 

. 

A 

4 

though      .... 

. 

A 

7 

I  pray       .... 

we  pray 

H 

Amen 

A 

GALATIANS. 

Chapter  I. 

lO 

for  if        ...         . 

. 

if 

II 

But 

For 

i8 

Peter,       .... 
Chapter  II. 

• 

Cephas,  (so  ii.  11,  14) 

14 

why          .... 

how 

i6 

knowing  .... 
Chapter  III. 

• 

yet  knowing 

I 

that   ye  should   not   obey 

the 

truth,    .... 

. 

A 

— 

among  you  ?     . 

. 

A 

12 

The  man  that  . 

He  that 

17 

in  Christ  .... 

. 

A 

29 

and  heirs 
Chapter  IV. 

• 

heirs 

6 

your  hearts,      . 

. 

our  hearts. 

7 

of  God  through  Christ.    . 

through  God. 

14 

my  temptation  which  was  in 

that  which  was  a  temptation  to 

my  flesh 

you  in  my  flesh 

15 

Where  is  then  the  blessedness 

Where  then  is  that  gratulation 

ye  spake  of? 

of  yourselves  ? 

24 

the  two     .... 

two 

25 

and  is       ...         . 

. 

for  she  is 

26 

the  mother  of  us  all. 
Chapter  V. 

our  mother. 

I 

Stand    fast   therefore    in 

the 

With    freedom    did   Christ  set 

liberty  wherewith  Christ  hath 

us  free  :  stand  fast  therefore. 

made  us  free, 

19 

Adultery, 

A 

21 

murders,  .... 

. 

A 

24 

Christ's    .... 

. 

of  Christ  Jesus 

138 


APPENDIX  III. 


15 


17 


Chapter  VI. 

in  Christ  Jesus 
availeth    . 
the  Lord  . 


EPHESIANS. 
Chapter  I. 


6 

wherein  he  made 

us  acceptec 

which  he  freely  bestowed  on  us 

15 

and  love  unto  all  the  saints, 

and  which  you  show  toward  all 

the  saints,  (.?  See  Col.  i.  4) 

18 

understanding  . 
Chapter  II. 

* 

heart 

I 

trespasses 

. 

your  trespasses 

17 

to  them     . 

. 

peace  to  them 

19 

but  . 
Chapter  III. 

* 

but  ye  are 

3 

he  made  known 

was  made  known 

6 

of  his  promise  in 

Christ  . 

of  the  promise  in  Christ  Jesus 

8 

among 

. 

unto 

9 

fellowship 

. 

dispensation 

— 

by  Jesus  Christ  : 

. 

A 

14 

of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 

A 

21 

by  Christ  Jesus 
Chapter  IV. 

and  in  Christ  Jesus 

6 

in  you  all. 

. 

in  all. 

9 

first 

. 

A 

17 

other  Gentiles 
Chapter  V. 

• 

the  Gentiles 

2 

loved  us,  . 

. 

loved  you, 

5 

ye  know  . 

. 

ye  know  of  a  surety, 

15 

See  then  that  ye 

walk  circum- 

Look  therefore  carefully  how  ye 

spectly. 

walk, 

17 

understanding . 

. 

understand 

29 

the  Lord  . 

. 

Christ 

30 

of  his  flebh  and  of  his  bones. 

A 

lO 
12 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 

Chapter  VI. 

my  brethren,    .         .         .         •   I  -^ 

of  the  darkness  of  this  world,  .   |  of  this  darkness, 


139 


PHILIPPIANS. 


Chapter  I. 

I     Jesus  Christ,    .... 

14     the  word 

16-17   {The  contents  of  these  verses 

18     notwithstanding 

23     which  is  far  better  : 

28     but  to  you  of  salvation,    . 

Chapter  II. 

9     a  name 

21     which  are  Jesus  Christ's  . 

30     not  regarding  .... 

Chapter  III. 
16     Nevertheless,  whereto  we  have 
already  attained,  let  us  walk 
by  the  same  rule,  let  us  mind 
the  same  thing. 

Chapter   IV. 
13     through  Christ  which 
23     The  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ  be  with  you  all.  Amen. 


Christ  Jesus, 

the  word  of  God 

are  transposed  in  Revised  V.) 

only  that 

for  it  is  very  far  better  : 

but  of  you  salvation, 


the  name 

of  Jesus  Christ. 

hazarding; 


Only,  whereunto  we  have  already 
attained,  by  that  same  rule 
let  us  walk.    (See  p.  78.) 


in  him  that 

The  grace   of    the  Lord    Jesus 
Christ  be  with  your  spirit. 


COLOSSIANS. 


14 
16 

23 
28 


Chapter  I. 

and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

which  is  come  unto  you,  as  it 
is  in  all  the  world ;  and 
bringeth  forth  fruit,  as  it 
doth  also  in  you,  . 

through  his  blood,    . 

that  are  (2) 

to  every  creature     . 

Jesus 


which  is  come  unto  you  ;  even 
as  it  is  also  in  all  the  world 
bearing  fruit  and  increasing, 
as  it  doth  in  you  also, 

A 

A 

in  all  creation 

A 


I40 


APPEADIX  III. 


Chapter  II. 


2 

being  knit 

they  being  knit 

— 

to  the  acknowledgment  of  the 

;      that  they  may  know  the  mystery 

mystery  of  God,  and  of  the 

of  God,  even  Christ, 

Father,  and  of  Christ  ; 

7 

therein  with  thanksgiving. 

in  thanksgiving. 

II 

of  the  sins 

A 

13 

in 

through 

— 

having  forgiven  you 

having  forgiven  us 

18 

intruding    into    those    things 

dwelling  in  the  things  which  he 

which  he  hath  not  seen, 

hath  seen. 

Chapter  III. 

7 

in  them 

in  these  things. 

13 

Christ       . 

i  the  Lord 

15 

of  God     . 

of  Christ 

17 

and  the  Father 

the  Father 

18 

own 

A 

20 

unto 

in 

22 

God  : 

the  Lord  : 

24 

for  ye  serve 

ye  serve 

25 

But  he  that      . 

For  he  that 

Chapter  IV. 

8- 

that     he     might     know    youi 

that   ye  may  know  our  estate, 

estate,  and    . 

and  that  he  may 

12 

Christ,      . 

Christ  Jesus, 

— 

complete  . 

fully  assured 

13 

a  great  zeal 

much  labour 

18 

Amen. 

A 

Chapter  I. 


I  THESSALONIANS. 


I     from  God  ....  Christ  . 
4-5     knowing,  brethren  beloved, 

your  election  of  God.     For 
5     we  were  among  you 


A 

knowing,   brethren  beloved    of 

God,  your  election,  how  that 
we  shewed  ourselves  toward  you 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


141 


Chapter  II. 


9 

JO 

19 

for  labouring    . 
among  you 
their  own  prophets, 
Christ 

working 
toward  you 
the  prophets, 
A 

Chapter  III. 

2 
11, 

and  our  fellowlabourer     . 
13  Christ  .... 

Chapter  IV. 

A 
.      A 

I 

8 

II 
13 

God,  so  ye 

who  hath   also  given  unto 
his  holy  Spirit. 

own 

I 

Chapter  V. 

us 

God,  even  as  ye  do  walk,— that 

ye 
>      who  giveth  his  Holy  Spirit  unto 

you. 
A 
we 

3 

5 
27 

2b 

For  when 

Ye  are  all 

holy          .... 

Amen 

.      When 

for  ye  are  all 

A 

A 

2  THESSALONIANS. 

Chapter  I. 

2 

8 
12 

our  Father 

Christ  :     .         .         .         . 

Christ  (I)          ... 

Chapter  II. 

the  Father 

A 

A 

2 

4 
6 
8 

10 
11 
16 
17 

of  Christ  . 
as  God     . 
in  his  time. 

the  Lord  shall  consume 
in  them    . 
shall  send 
even 

you  in  every  good  wore 
work.    . 

1  and 

of  the  Lord 
A 

in  his  own  season. 
the  Lord  Jesus  shall  slay 
for  them 
sendeth 
A 

them  in  every  good  work  and 
word. 

142 


APPENDIX  III. 


4 

12 

14 
i8 


Chapter  III. 
command  you. 
by  our 
and  have  . 
Amen. 


command, 
in  the 

that  ye  have 
A 


I  TIMOTHY. 
Chapter  I. 
and  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  which 


is  our  hope 

and  Christ  Jesus  our  hope. 

2 

our  Father  and  Jesus  Christ    . 

the  Father  and  Christ  Jesus 

4 

godly  edifying  .... 

a  dispensation  of  God 

12 

And  I  thank     .... 

I  thank 

1/ 

wise          ..... 
Chapter  II. 

A 

3 

For 

A 

7 

in  Christ 

Chapter  III. 

A 

3 

not  given  to  wine,    . 

no  brawler. 

not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre  ; 

A 

4 

a  brawler,         .... 

contentious, 

i6 

God 

Chapter  IV. 

He  who 

6 

Jesus  Christ,    .... 

Christ  Jesus, 

lO 

suffer  reproach, 

strive, 

12 

in  spirit, 

Chapter  V. 

A 

4 

good  and 

A 

i6 

man  or 

A 

21 

the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,     . 
Chapter  VI. 

Christ  Jesus, 

5 

Perverse  disputings 

wranglings 

from  such  withdraw  thyself.     . 

A 

7 

and  it  is  certain 

A 

12 

also 

A 

17 

the  living          .... 

A 

19 

eternal  life. 

the  life  which  is  life  indeed. 

21 

Amen 

A 

SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


143 


2  TIMOTHY 
Chapter  I. 

I,  10     Jesus  Christ 

3-4     in    my   prayers    night    and 

day  ;  greatly  desiring  to  see 

thee, 
1 1     of  the  Gentiles. 


Christ  Jesus 

in  my  supphcations,  night  and 
day  longing  to  see  thee, 


Chapter  II. 

3 

Thou  therefore   endure 

hard- 

ness,     . 

. 

Suffer  hardship  with  me. 

— 

Jesus  Christ.    . 

. 

Christ  Jesus. 

7 

and  the  Lord  give  thee 

. 

for  the  Lord  shall  give  thee 

19 

of  Christ  . 

. 

of  the  Lord 

21 

and  meet . 

meet 

Chapter  III. 

10 

hast  fully  known 
Chapter  IV. 

.   1  didst  follow 

I 

the  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 

Christ  Jesus, 

14 

reward  him 

the  Lord  will  render  to  him 

18 

And  the  Lord  . 

The  Lord 

22 

Jesus  Christ 

A 

— 

Amen. 

A 

TITUS. 

Chapter  I. 

4 

the  Lord  Jesus  Christ 

. 

Christ  Jesus 

7 

not  given  to  wine,    . 

. 

no  brawler, 

— 

not  given  to  filthy  lucre  ; 

. 

not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre  ; 

Chapter  II. 
sincerity  . 

Chapter  III. 

and  powers,     . 
Amen. 


to  authorities, 
A 


144 


APPENDIX  III. 


PHILEMON. 


2 

to  our  beloved  Apphia,    . 

to  Apphia  our  sister, 

6 

Jesus.       .         .         . 

A 

12 

whom  I  have  sent  again  :  thou 

whom  I  have  sent  back  to  thee 

therefore   receive   him,  that 

in  his  own  person,  that  is  my 

is,  mine  own  bowels  : 

very  heart  : 

20 

refresh  my  bowels  in  the  Lord. 

refresh  my  heart  in  Christ. 

25 

Amen 

A 

HEBREWS. 

Chapter  L 

2 

in  these  last  days     . 

in  the  end  of  these  days 

3 

when  he  had  by  himself  purged 

when  he  had  made  purification 

our  sins, 

of  sins. 

8 

the  sceptre       .... 

and  a  sceptre 

12 

and  they 

Chapter  III. 

As  a  garment,  and  they 

1  Christ  Jesus  ;    . 

9     when  your  fathers  tempted  me, 
proved  me, 

lo    that 

1 6     for  some  .  .  :  .  provoke  . 

—    howbeit  not  all  ...  .  Moses. 

Chapter  IV. 

2  not  being  mixed  with  faith  in 

them 
7     as  it  is  said,      .         .        ••         . 

Chapter  V. 

4     he  that  is  .... 

1 2     that  one  teach  you  again  which 

be  the  first  principles 


Chapter  VI. 

4    who   were    once    enhghtened, 

and  have  tasted    . 
lo    labour  of  love  .... 


even  Jesus  ; 

wherewith  your  fathers  tempted 

me  by  proving  me, 
this 

For  who  ....  provoke  ? 
nay,  did  not  all  they  .  .  .  Moses  ? 


because  they  were  not  united  by 

faith  with  them 
as  it  hath  been  before  said. 


when  he  is 

again  that  some  one  teach  you 

the    rudiments    of    the    first 

principles 

who  were  once  enlightened  and 

tasted  (?  otice  were) 
the  love 


SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


45 


Chapter  VII 

4    even 

14     priesthood 

17     he  testifieth,     .... 
18-19  For  the  law  made  nothing 
perfect,  but  the 

2 1  after  the  order  of  Melchisedec  : 

22  by  so  much      .... 


A 

priests. 

it  is  witnessed  of  him, 
(for  the  law  made  nothing  per- 
fect), and  a 
A 
by  so  much  also 


Chapter  VIII. 

2  and  not    . 

4  priests 

[  I  his  neighbour  . 

[2  and  their  iniquities 


not 

those 

his  fellow-citizen 

A 


Chapter  IX. 


9 

then  present,  in  which 

now  present  ;  according  to  which 

(i.e.  parable) 

10 

which  stood  only  in  meats  and 

being    only    (with    meats    and 

drinks,  and  divers  washings. 

drinks  and  diverse  washings) 

and  carnal  ordinances, 

carnal  ordinances. 

T7 

otherwise  it  is  of  no  strength 

at  all 

for  doth  it  ever  avail ,  .  .  .  ? 

28 

so  Christ 

Chapter  X. 

so  Christ  also, 

I 

can 

they  can 

0 

offered  ?  .  .  .  .  sins. 

offered,  ....  sins  ? 

7 

0  God.     . 

A 

12 

this  man  . 

he 

16 

minds       .         .         . 

mind 

30 

saith  the  Lord. 

A 

34 

of  me  in  my  bonds. 

on  them  that  were  in  bonds, 

knowing  in  yourselves  that  ye 

knowing  that  ye  yourselves  have 

have  in  heaven  a  better  and 

a   better   possession    and   an 

an  enduring  substance. 

abiding  one. 

38 

the  just 

my  righteous  one 

L 

146 


APPENDIX  III, 


Chapter  XI. 

3 

things  which  are  seen 

what  is  seen 

II 

and  was  dehvered  of  a  child    . 

A 

13 

and  were  persuaded  of  them   . 

A 

20 

concerning       .... 

even  concerning 

32 

and  of  {three)  .... 
Chapter  XII. 

AAA 

3 

himself, 

themselves  (?) 

7 

if  ye  endure  chastening,  . 

It  is  for  chastening  ye  endure  ; 

{see  margin) 

15 

many 

the  many 

17 

rejected  :  for  he  found  no  place 

rejected  (for  he  found  no  place 

of  repentance,  though 

of  repentance),  though 

20 

or  thrust  through  with  a  dart. 

A 

24 

better  things    .... 

better 

25 

who 

when  they 

if  we 

who 

26 

I  shake    

will  I  make  to  tremble 

28 

godly  fear  :      .        .        .        . 
Chapter  XIII. 

awe  : 

6 

and           .         .         *         .         . 

A 

— 

fear  what  man  shall  do  unto  me. 

fear.  What  shall  man  do  unto 
me? 

9 

about        

away 

20 

our  Lord  Jesus,  that  great 

the  great 

— 

through    

with 



covenant 

covenant,  even  our  Lord  Jesus, 

21 

work 

thing 

in  you 

JAMI 
Chapter  I. 

in  us 

19 

Wherefore,       .... 

Ye  know  this, 

let 

But  let 

25 

he 

Chapter  II. 

A 

3 

here  under        .... 

sit  under 

19 

that  there  is  one  God  ;     . 

that  God  is  one  ; 

SELECT   TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


H7 


Chapter  III. 

5  how  great  a  matter  a  little  fire 

kindleth  ! 

6  a  world  of  iniquity  :  so  is  the 

tongue  among  our  members, 
that  it  &c. 

8     unruly 

12     so  can  no  fountain  both  yield 
salt  water  and  fresh. 


how  much  wood  is  kindled  by 

how  small  a  fire  ! 
the  world  of  iniquity  among  our 

members  is  the  tongue,  which 

&c. 
restless 
neither    can    salt    water    yield 

sweet. 


Chapter  IV. 
4     adulterers  and . 


5 

The  spirit  that  dwelleth 

in  u 

s      doth  the  spirit  which  he  made  to 

lusteth  to  envy  ? 

dwell  in  us  long  unto  envy- 
ing ?    {See  viargin) 

II 

and  (I)     . 

. 

or 

12 

There  is  one  lawgiver, 

One  only   is   the  lawgiver  and 
jw-dge, 



another?  . 

. 

thy  neighbour  ? 

r4 

For  what  is  your  life  ?  It  is  evei 

1      What  is  your  life  ?  for  ye  are 

Chapter  V. 

5 

as    . 

.      A 

9 

condemned  :     . 

.      judged  : 

II 

endure,     . 

endured  : 

i6 

Confess    . 

Confess  therefore 

— 

faults 

sins 

I   PE 

.TER, 

Chapter  I. 

7 

much 

A 

12 

unto  us     . 

unto  you 

i6 

Be  ye       . 

Ye  shall  be 

20 

in  these  last  times 

in  the  end  of  the  times 

22 

through  the  Spirit 
with  a  pure  heart 

^                          1 

from  the  heart                              / 

23 

for  ever.  . 

A                                                  / 

24 

of  man 

the  flower  thereof    . 

thereof                                          j 
the  flower                                   , 

148 


APPENDIX  III 


Chapier  II. 

6    Wherefore  also 

Because 

12     shall 

A 

2 1     for  us,  leaving  us      .         . 

for  you,  leaving  you 

25     as  sheep  going  astray 

going  astray  like  sheep 

15 

16 

20 

21 


Chapter  III. 

having  compassion  one  of  an- 
other, love  as  brethren,  be 
pitiful,  be  courteous  ; 

knowing  that  ye  are  thereunto 
called, 

the  Lord  God  in  your  hearts  : 

whereas  they  speak  evil  of  you, 
as  of  evildoers,     . 

once 

The  like  figure  whereunto  even 
baptism  doth  also  now  save  us 


compassionate,  loving  as  breth- 
ren, tender-hearted,  humble- 
minded  ; 

for  hereunto  were  ye  called, 
in  your  hearts  Christ  as  Lord  : 

wherein  ye  are  spoken  against, 
A 

which  after  a  true  likeness  doth 
now  save  you,  even  baptism. 


I 
3 

8 
J4 


16 


Chapter  IV. 

for  us 

of  our  life         .... 
us 

shall  cover  the 

on  their  part  he  is  evil  spoken 
of,  but  on  your  part  he  is 
glorified.        .         .         .         . 

on  this  behalf. 


A 
A 
A 

covereth  a 


A 

in  this  name. 


II 
I?, 
14 


Chapter  V. 

willingly  ;  .         .         .         • 

be  subject  one  to  another,  and 

be  clothed  with  humility : 

Jesus        

make    you    perfect,     stablish, 

strengthen,  settle  you. 
glory  and  .... 

wherein  ye  stand.     . 
Jesus.     Amen. 


wilhngly,  according  unto  God  ; 
gird  yourselves  with  humility,  to 

serve  one  another  : 
A 
shall   himself  perfect,   stablish, 

strengthen  you. 
A 

stand  ye  fast  therein. 
A 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


149 


2  PETER. 


21 


18 


Chapter  I. 

to  glory  and  virtue. 

holy  men  of  God  spake    . 

Chapter  II. 

pernicious  ways ;      .         .         . 
as  natural  brute  beasts,  made 

speak  evil  of  the  things  that 

they    understand    not  ;  and 

shall  utterly  perish   in  their 

own  corruption  ; 
and  shall  receive   the  reward 

of  unrighteousness,  as  they 

that 
sporting  themselves  with  their 

own   deceivings  while  they 

feast  with  you  ; 
Bosor       ..... 

clouds 

to  whom  the  mist  of  darkness 

is  reserved  for  ever, 
that  were  clean  escaped 


1CHAPTER   III. 

there   shall   come 
days  scoffers,   ■ 
in  the  night 


in  the  last 


by  his  own  glory  and  virtue, 
men  spake  from  God 


lascivious  doings  ; 

as  creatures  without  reason, 
born  mere  animals 

railing  in  matters  whereof  they 
are  ignorant,  shall  in  their 
destroying  surely  be  destroyed, 

suffering  wrong  as   the  hire  of 


-doim 


men  tnat 


revelling    in    their    love  -  feasts 
while  they  feast  with  you  ; 

Beor- 
and  mists 

for  whom  the  blackness  of  dark- 
ness hath  been  reserved, 
who  are  just  escaping 


in  the  last  days  mockers  shall 
come  with  mockery, 

A 


I  JOHN 
Chapter  I. 

write  we  unto  you,  that  your 


joy  may  be  full.    . 

Chapter  II. 
7     Brethren, 

27  the  same  anointing 
—    ye  shall  abide  . 

28  when  he  shall  appear, 


we  write,  that  our  joy  may  be 
fulfilled. 


Beloved, 

his  anointing 

ye  abide 

if  he  shall  be  manifested, 


i;o 


APPENDIX  111, 


Chapter  III. 

I  of  God  : 

5  to  take  away  our  sins  ;     . 

14  his  brother        .... 

16  the  love  of  God 

Chapter  IV. 

3     that  Jesus  Christ  is  come  in 
the  flesh        .... 
20     how  can  he  love 

Chapter  V. 

7  in  heaven  ....  are  one. 

8  and  there  are  three  that  bear 

witness  in  earth,    . 
13     that  behave   on  the   name  of 
the  Son  of  God  ;  . 

20  may  know         .... 

21  Amen 


of  God  :  and  such  we  are  : 

to  take  away  sins ; 

A 

love 


Jesus 
cannot  love 


A 

A 

A 

knovsr 

A 


the  Lord 

we  lose  .  .  .  we  receive  . 
transgresseth    .         .         .         . 
he  that  abideth  in  the  doctrine 
of  Christ 


2  JOHN. 
A 


13     Amen A 


ye  lose  ...  ye  receive 
goeth  onward 


he  that  abideth  in  the  teaching, 


3  JOHN. 


5     to  the  brethren,  and  to  stran- 
gers; 
7     for  his  name's  sake 

9     I  wrote 

1 3     many  things  to  write, 


toward  them  that  are  brethren 

and  strangers  withal ; 
for  the  sake  of  the  Name 
I  wrote  somewhat 
many  things  to  write  unto  thee, 


3     our  common     . 
19     separate  themselves, 
22     making  a  difference  ; 


JUDE. 


the  common 
make  separations, 
who  are  in  doubt  : 


SELECT  TEXTUAL  CORRECTIONS, 


51 


23    and  others  save  with  fear,  pull- 
ing them  out  of  the  fire  ; 

25     wise 

—    and  power  both  now  and  ever. 


and  some  save,  snatching  them 
out  of  the  fire  ;  and  on  some 
have  mercy  with  fear  ; 

A 

and  power  before  all  time,  and 


REV 

ELA' 

noN. 

Chapter  I. 

2 

and  of  all  things 

, 

even  of  all  things 

6 

kings  and  priests 

, 

to  be  a  kingdom,  to  be  priests 

8 

the  beginning  and  the  ending;  | 

A 



the  Lord, 

the  Lord  God, 

9 

Jesus  Christ  {bis) 

Jesus  {bis) 

u 

I  am  .  .  .  ,  and, 

A 

13 

seven        .... 

A 

e8 

Amen ;     ,         .         .         . 

A 



of  hell  and 

A 

20 

candlesticks  which  thou  sawest 

candlesticks 

Chapter  IL 

7 

the  midst  of     . 

. 

A 

9, 

13     works,  and 

. 

A 

E5 

,  which  thing  I  hate. 

. 

in  like  manner. 

20 

to  teach  and  to  seduce     . 

and  she  teacheth  and  seduceth 

21 

of    her   fornication;    and 

she 

and  she  willeth  not  to  repent  of 

repented  not 

her  fornication. 

27 

shall  they  be  broken 
Chapter  IV. 

* 

are  broken 

10 

fall  down  ...  -  worship  . 

0  .  . 

shall  fall  down  ....  shall  wor- 

cast 

ship  ....  shall  cast 

Chapter  V. 

14 

him  that  liveth  for  ever  and 
Chapter  VI. 

ever. 

I  A. 

I 

3,  5,  7   and  see. 

. 

A 

15 

the  mighty  men,      . 

.■ 

the  strong, 

152 


APPENDIX  III. 


5-8 


17 


17 


5 


Chapter  VII. 

were  sealed    . 

Chapter  X. 

5     his  hand  .... 

Chapter  XI. 

5     the  kingdoms  ibis)    . 
-     are  become      .... 
and  art  to  come 

Chapter  XII. 

woe  to  the   inhabiters  of  the 

earth  and  of  the  sea  ! 
of  Jesus  Christ. 

Chapter  XIV. 

guile : 

—  before  the  throne  of  God. 

8  Babylon  is  fallen,  is  fallen,  that 

great  city, 

9  a  third  angel    .... 

Chapter  XV. 

3,4,8,10,12,17     angel 

Chapter  XVI. 

5     O  Lord,    .... 

—  and  wast,  and  shalt  be,    . 

7  another  out  of  the  altar  say, 

16  Armageddon    . 

17  of  heaven. 

Chapter  XVII. 

4    and  filthiness   .... 

8  that  was,  and  is  not,  and  yet  is. 

1 3     shall  give         .... 

Chapter  XVIII. 

2     mightily  with  a  strong  voice,  . 
13     cinnamon,        .         .         .         . 


A  (except  Judah  and  Benjamin) 


.  I  his  right  hand 


the  kingdom 
is  become 
A 


woe  for  the  earth  and  for  the 

sea  : 
of  Jesus. 


lie: 
A 

fallen,    fallen    is    Babylon    the 

great, 
another  angel,  a  third, 


I  A 


and  which  wast,  thou  Holy  One, 
the  altar  saying, 
Har  Magedon. 
A 


,  even  the  unclean  things 
how  that  he   was,  and  is 

and  shall  come, 
give 


with  a  mighty  voice, 
cinnamon,  and  spice, 


not, 


SELECT  TEXTUAL   CORRECTIONS. 


153 


Chapter  XIX. 
13     dipped  in  .         .         . 

17     supper  of  the  great  God  ; 

Chapter  XXI. 
27     that  defileth,     . 

Chapter  XXII. 

I     a  pure  river 
—     of  the  Lamb.    . 


20 
21 


God  of  the  holy  prophets 

be  unjust 

be  filthy   .... 

be  righteous 

be  holy     .... 

Even  so,  come,  Lord  Jesus. 

with  you  all.     . 


sprinkled  with 
great  supper  of  God ; 


I  unclean, 


a  river 

of  the   Lamb,   in  the  midst    of 

the  street  thereof. 
God  of  the  spirits  of  the  prophets 
do  unrighteousness 
be  made  filthy 
do  righteousness 
be  made  holy 
Come,  Lord  Jesus, 
with  the  saints. 


The  foregoing  are  but  a  small  selection  of  the  numerous  variations 
exhibited  by  the  mss.  of  the  Apocalypse.  They  seem  to  be  the  most 
signal. 

In  using  this  Index  it  must  be  understood — 

(i)  That  all,  or  nearly  all,  the  changes  noted  are  such  as  arose 
from  n.ew  readings  of  the  Greek  text. 

(2)  That  a  vast  number  of  new  readings  are  omitted,  which  seem 
to  make  no  signal  change  in  the  sense. 

Many  changes  of  small  importance  are  recorded  in  this  Index,  I 
am  quite  sure.  I  can  but  express  my  earnest  hope,  that  none  of  not- 
able importance  have  been  omitted  through  oversight. 


POSTSCRIPT. 

I  HAD  corrected  the  proof  of  my  prefatory  letter  to  Dr. 
Scrivener,  and  this  final  sheet  of  my  Index  was  before  me, 
when  the  new  number  (304)  of  the  '  Quarterly  Review  '  was 
brought  into  my  study.  Its  opening  article,  on  the  Revised 
Greek  Text,  I  read  on  the  same  evening,  and  again  the 
following  day.  I  read  it  without  amazement,  for  certain 
reasons  ;  but  I  read  it  also  without  amusement.  The  '  furor 
theologicus '  never  amuses,  it  only  saddens  me.  I  know 
what  it  has  done  in  the  ages  past ;  I  see  what  it  is  doing 
in  the  present  day  ;  I  dread  what  it  may  do  in  the  times  that 
are  coming.  But  many  there  are  of  two  classes  who  will  be 
more  than  amused  ;  they  will  be  delighted  by  the  reviewer's 
unsparing  onslaught.  What  classes  I  mean  his  acute  mind 
may  easily  discern,  and  I  leave  him  to  consider  the  re- 
spective grounds  of  their  delight. 

The  vials  of  the  reviewer's  wrath  are  chiefly  emptied  on 
the  textual  criticism  of  Dr.  Westcott  and  Dr.  Hort.  That 
criticism,  I  own,  did  often  decide  the  judgment  of  the 
revising  company,  but,  in  disputed  cases,  always  after  argu- 
ments on  the  different  sides  heard  with  careful  attention. 
The  reviewer,  '  non  videns  manticse  quod  in  tergo  est,'  im- 
putes to  these  two  divines  a  magisterial  tone  and  language 
(p.  360).  But  he  seems  (if  I  do  not  mistake  him)  to  admit — 
and  much  of  what  he  has  said  tends  to  prove — that  he  has 


156  POSTSCRIPT. 

not    accurately    mastered   the   critical   principles  of  these 
eminently  learned  and  indefatigably  laborious  scholars. 

I  do  not  notice  this  review  with  any  purpose  of  formally 
replying  to  its  assault  upon  the  work  of  revision.  Even  if 
time  and  space  allowed,  I  have  neither  the  authority  nor 
the  minute  textual  learning  which  would  justify  me  in 
attempting  that  task.  But  something  I  must  say  in  reference 
to  my  second  sermon.  And  I  think  the  language  used  by 
the  reviewer  in  his  opening  pages  calls  for  that  brief  notice 
which  this  occasion  offers.^ 

The  facts  of  our  work,  simply  and  shortly  stated,  are 
these  : — • 

In  May  1870  the  Southern  Convocation,  which  is  the 
larger  fraction  of  the  Anglican  Church,  nominated  a  com- 
mittee to  provide  a  revision  of  the  Authorised  Version  of  the 
Bible.  This  committee,  from  itself  as  a  nucleus,  formed  two 
revising  companies,  and  co-opted  other  members  into  each. 
The  Presses  of  our  two  ancient  Universities  purchased  the 
copyright  of  the  entire  work.  The  New  Testament  Company, 
of  which  alone  I  can  speak,  carried  on  its  labours  for  eleven 
years,  losing  two  by  death,  and  co-opting  one  new  member. 
The  Presses  published  the  Revised  New  Testament  in  May 
last,  and  when  it  was  presented  to  the  Southern  Convocation, 
it  was  received  with  a  vote  of  thanks  to  the  Company — that 
Company  consisting  of  one  archbishop,  several  bishops, 
deans,  archdeacons,  and  other  Christian  ministers. 

Of  such  a  work  and  such  workmen  the  '  Quarterly  ' 
reviewer  thinks  it  consistent  with  the  Christian  character, 
and  not  beneath  his  personal  dignity,  to  suggest  (p.  307) 
that  they  are  committing  '  assault  and  battery '  on  '  the  very 
citadel  of  revealed  truth  ; '  that  '  it  is  high  time  for  every 

^  I  am  bound  to  state  that  the  italics,  in  what  follows,  are  all  my 
own>  and  that  my  use  of  them  has  obHged  me,  once  or  twice,  to 
neglect  those  of  the  reviewer,  but,  I  hope  and  believe,  without  injury 
to  his  meaning'. 


POSTSCRIPT.  157 

faithful  man  to  bestir  himself,'  '  ne  quid  detrimenti  civitas 
Dei  capiat ; '  that  '  such  as  have  made  Greek  textual  criti- 
cism in  any  degree  their  study,  should  address  themselves  to 
the  investigation  of  the  claims  of  this,  the  latest  product  of 
the  combined  Biblical  learning  of  the  Church  and  of  the 
sects.' 

Language  like  this  can  affect  the  revisers  in  one  way 
only;  it  must  make  them  sorry  that  the  writer  should  have  used 
it.  The  effects  of  it  on  himself  become  manifest  in  the  sen- 
tences which  next  follow.  He  has  overlooked  the  real  cir- 
cumstances of  the  case.  He  goes  on  to  say  that  the  authors 
of  this  new  revision  of  the  Greek  text  '  must  experience  at 
the  hands  of  the  Church  nothing  short  of  stern  and  well- 
merited  rebuke.'  The  rebuke  which  these  prelates  and 
others  have  received  is  a  vote  of  thanks  from  the  Southern 
House  of  Convocation.  '  No  middle  course  '  (so  he  goes 
on) '  presents  itself,  since  assuredly  to  construct  a  new  Greek 
text  formed  no  part  of  the  instructions  which  the  revisionists 
received  at  the  ha7ids  of  the  Conwiittee  of  the  Southern  Pro- 
vince' If  the  reviewer  had  carefully  read  and  remembered 
the  Preface  of  the  Revised  New  Testament,  he  would  have 
spared  himself  this  signal  error.  The  Committee  was,  as  I 
have  said,  itself  the  nucleus  of  the  revising  company,  the 
co-opting  body,  the  guide  and  guardian  (so  to  say)  of  our 
initial  acts  ;  and  as  we  began,  so  we  went  on  "to  the  close. 
That  Committee  had  received  from  Convocation  itself  the 
instruction  '  that  the  revision  be  so  conducted  as  to  com- 
prise both  marginal  renderings  and  such  emendations  as  it 
may  be  found  necessary  to  insert  in  the  text  of  the  Autho- 
rised Version.'  But  I  return  to  our  reviewer.  '  Rather,'  he 
adds,  'were  they  warned  against  venturing  on  such  an 
experiment,'  the  fundamental  principle  of  the  entire  under- 
taking having  been  declared  at  the  outset  to  be  that  '  a 
revision  of  the  Authorised  Version  is  desirable,'  and  the 
fundamental  rule  laid  down  for  the  revising  body  being  that 


IS8  POSTSCRIPT. 

they  should  introduce  into  the  text  as  few  alterations  '  as 
possible  consistent  with  faithfulness.'  Error  here  grows  out 
of  error  ;  the  resolution  of  Convocation  itself  that  revision  is 
desirable  is  confused  with  the  first  '  by-law  '  framed  by  the 
Committee  '  to  introduce  '  &c.  He  then  proceeds  :  '  It 
cannot,  of  course,  be  denied  that  this  last  clause  set  the  door 
inconveniently  wide  open  for  innovation.  But  then  a  limit 
was  prescribed  to  the  amount  of  licence  which  might  possibly 
result  by  the  insertion  of  a  proviso,  which,  however,  is  found 
to  have  been  disregarded  by  the  revisionists  almost  entirely. 
The  condition  was  imposed  upon  thetn,  that,  whenever 
decidedly  preponderating  evidence  constrained  their  adoption 
of  so?ne  change  in  the  text  from  ivhich  the  Authorised  Version 
was  made,  they  shoidd  indicate  such  alteration  in  the  margin. 
Will  it  be  believed  that,  this  notwithstanding,  not  one  of  the 
many  alteratio7is  which  have  been  introduced  itito  the  original 
text  is  distinctly  so  commemorated  ?  ' 

Will  it  be  believed  that  the  clause  setting  open  the  door 
was  the  first  by-law  framed  by  the  Committee  for  the  guidance 
of  itself  after  its  strength  should  have  been  completed  by 
co-optation  ?  Will  it  be  believed  that  the  proviso  requiring 
the  marginal  indication  of  every  textual  change  was  another 
by-law  of  the  Committee  for  its  own  guidance  when  it  should 
expand  into  a  company — a  law  which  they  were  at  liberty 
to  modify  or  abolish,  if  it  eventually  proved  to  be  incon- 
venient ?  Will  it  be  believed  that  in  our  Preface  (iii.  i)  it  is 
distinctly  said  that  it  did  prove  inconvenient  to  record  the 
changes  in  the  margin,  and  that  a  better  mode  of  giving 
them  publicity  was  found — namely,  the  printing  them  in 
those  two  Greek  texts  which  have  now  been  edited  and 
published  by  Archdeacon  Palmer  and  Dr.  Scrivener  severally? 
Finally,  will  it  be  believed  that  either  this  reviewer  has  failed 
to  read  the  Preface  to  the  book  which  he  lays  under  his 
anathema  ?  or  that  he  read  it  so  cursorily  as  not  to  master 
its  contents  ?  or  that,  having  read  and  mastered,  he  forgot 


POSTSCRIPT.  159 

them  when  he  sat  down  to  demoHsh  the  book,  and  so  drew 
up  an  indictment,  every  count  of  which  is  an  error  ? 

I  am  prepared  to  expect  that  this  phihppic,  when 
examined  by  experts,  will  be  found  throughout  'quahs  ab 
incepto.'  In  the  course  of  my  experience  in  the  Jerusalem 
Chamber,  I  never  heard  from  my  friend  Dr.  Scrivener, 
whom  the  reviewer  proclaims  to  be  'facile  princeps  '  in  our 
company,  any  suggestion  that  the  most  ancient  uncial 
codices  are  so  contemptibly  corrupt  as  to  be  unsafe  guides 
in  the  constitution  of  a  Greek  text.  Yet  so  the  reviewer 
insists ;  while  we  are  left  to  suppose  (for  he  is  not  explicit  on 
this  point)  that  the  few  cursive  MSS.  on  which  his  cherished 
'  textus  receptus '  (so  called)  mainly  rests,  are  more  trust- 
worthy— MSS.  having  their  parentage  and  growth  in  those 
enlightened  times  that  lie  between  the  death  of  Charlemagne 
and  the  Crusades,  or  transcribed  from  these  in  subsequent 
centuries,  which,  though  not  devoid  of  scholastic  learnino-, 
were,  in  the  Western  Church,  ignorant  of  Greek.  ^ 

I  am  compelled  by  this  review  to  withdraw  a  statement 
on  which  I  have  ventured  more  than  once,  to  the  effect  that 
the  reading  B^o^  in  i  Tim.  iii.  16  is  now  abandoned  by  all 
Anglican  divines.     I  really  thought  that  when  a  divine  at 

'  The  only  rule  of  textual  criticism  discoverable  in  this  review  is 
(317)  that  the  text  which  has  been  '  in  possession'  for  three  centuries 
and  a  half  should  be  let  alone  when  the  evidence  for  and  against  it  is 
evenly  balanced.  If  a  corrupt  text  has  been  'in  possession'  for 
ever  so  long  through  the  timid  negligence  of  authority,  it  has  no  just 
claim  to  be  respected  on  that  account.  In  any  case,  it  is  a  mere 
truism  to  say  that  what  stands  should  be  left  standing  if  no  reason 
is  shown  for  removing  it.  But  where  and  how  we  are  to  find  valid 
reasons,  when  they  exist,  this  writer  does  not  tell  us.  Dr.  Scrivener 
has  given  four  rules  for  that  purpose  (Intr.  p.  484),  which  I  commend 
to  the  attention  of  my  readers.  And  of  Cod.  B  he  says  (480)  :  '  It 
is  a  document  of  such  value  that  it  grows  by  experience  even  upon 
those  who  may  have  been  a  little  prejudiced  against  it,  adding  that 
its  best  associate  is  Cod.  C,  where  the  testimony  of  that  precious 
palimpsest  can  be  had. ' 


i6o  POSTSCRIPT. 

once  so  learned  and  so  conservative  as  Bishop  C.  Words- 
worth had  forsaken  it,  there  was  no  further  chance  of 
support  for  it  in  our  Church.  I  find  myself  mistaken  ;  for 
in  this  reviewer  it  finds  an  uncompromising  champion,  who 
would  cry  to  the  last,  U^p.  8'  aAAwv  /xovocfipwv  djxi.  Well,  I 
have  no  room  for  the  argument  here,  and  I  must  be  content 
with  referring  to  its  full  statement  in  Dr.  Scrivener's  Intro- 
duction, 552-6.  I  will  only  add  that  when  the  reviewer 
calls  fxva-TTjpiov  ...  OS  a  '  patent  absurdity,'  he  seems  to  have 
forgotten  the  facts  of  grammar.  If  fxva-Trjptov  means  Christ 
(and  it  does),  the  reference  to  it  by  masc.  os  is  one  of  the 
simplest  examples  of  synesis,  a  construction  which  abounds 
in  Greek  and  Latin,  and  becomes,  in  this  place,  inevitable. 


i6i 


NOTE. 

On  the  eve  of  publication  I  have  received  the  Philadelphian 
'Sunday  School  Times'  of  Nov.  5,  containing  a  paper  on 
Westcott  and  Hort's  Greek  Testament,  vol.  i.  I  cannot  refrain 
from  citing  here  the  main  portion  of  it,  as  a  wholesome  antidote 
to  the  unfair  and  intemperate  critique  which  has  drawn  forth 
my  postscript. 

'  This  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament  will  mark  an  epoch  in 
the  history  of  New  Testament  criticism.  Dr.  Schaff  accepts  its 
text  enthusiastically  as  "  the  oldest  and  purest "  which  has  yet 
been  published.  Many  in  England,  and  still  more,  probably, 
in  Germany,  will  heartily  welcome  it  as  a  work  bearing  every- 
where the  stamp  of  independent,  original  research,  and  the 
most  painstaking  care.  But  in  some  quarters  it  cannot  fail  to 
encounter  deadly  hostility,  and  before  its  conclusions  are 
generally  adopted  there  will  be  much  discussion.  Though  the 
work  will  now  be  more  fairly  judged  than  if  it  had  been  pub- 
lished twenty  years  ago,  the  charge  of  extreme  rashness  will 
doubtless  be  brought  against  the  editors  by  such  critics  as 
Dean  Burgon  and  the  Rev.  J.  B.  McClellan  ;  and  Dr.  Scrivener, 
who  had  the  use  of  their  "  provisional  "  text,  has  already,  in  the 
second  edition  of  his  Introduction  (1874),  strongly  expressed 
his  dissent  from  many  of  their  conclusions.  Even  scholars  who 
have  become  emancipated  from  the  superstitious  worship  of  the 
so-called  "  received  text,"  and  who  are  ready  to  decide  critical 
questions  on  purely  critical  principles,  and  not  by  their  "  infal- 
lible instincts,"  may  be  startled  at  the  boldness  of  the  editors  in 
the  use  of  the  pruning-knife,  which  in  their  hands  cuts  deeper 
than  even  in  those  of  Tischendorf  and  Tregelles.  Westcott  and 
Hort,  for  example,  regard  as  later  additions  to  the  text  not  only 
the  last  twelve  verses  of  Mark,  the  account  of  the  descent  of 
the  angel  into  the  pool  of  Bethesda  (or  "  Bethzatha,"  as  they 
read),  and  the  story  of  the  woman  taken  in  adultery  (John  vii. 
53  to  viii.   II),  but   the  passages   noted  in  the  margin  of  the 

M 


\l 


'62  NOJE, 

Revised  Version,  at  Matt.  xvi.  2,  3  ;  Luke  xxii.  19,  20,  43, 
44  ;  xxiii.  34  ;  xxiv.  3,  6,  12,  36,  40,  51,  52  ;  and  John  iii.  13,  as 
"omitted  by  some  [or  "many"]  ancient  authorities."  Other 
readings  of  theirs  will  seem  to  many,  at  first  sight  at  least,  very 
questionable. 

'  But  the  last  charge  which  can  be  justly  brought  against 
the  editors  is  that  of  rashness.  They  may  have  erred  in  judg- 
ment, but  they  have  come  to  their  conclusions  with  great 
deliberation.  The  history  of  the  work  entitles  it,  not,  indeed, 
to  immediate,  unquestioning  acceptance  as  final  in  its  decisions, 
but  to  the  most  respectful  consideration.  It  "  was  projected 
and  commenced  in  1853,  and  the  work  has  never  been  laid 
more  than  partially  aside  in  the  interval,  though  it  has  suffered 
many  delays  and  interruptions.  The  mode  of  procedure  adopted 
by  the  editors  from  the  first  was  to  work  out  their  results  inde- 
pendently of  each  other,  to  hold  no  counsel  together  except 
upon  results  already  provisionally  obtained,  and  to  discuss  on 
paper  the  comparatively  few  points  of  initial  difference  until 
either  agreement  or  final  difference  was  reached."  To  this  it 
may  be  added  that  a  large  part  of  the  text,  the  Gospels  at 
least,  appears  to  have  been  in  type  for  more  than  ten  years, 
during  which  period  it  has  been  revised  and  re-revised  with 
great  care,  as  deeper  investigations  have  led  the  editors  to 
modify  here  and  there  their  earlier  decisions.  As  to  the 
character  of  the  editors,  none  who  are  acquainted  with  the 
writings  of  Professor  Westcott  and  Dr.  Hort  will  question  their 
eminent  intellectual  and  moral  qualifications  for  the  task  they 
have  undertaken, — the  great  moral  qualification,  in  studies  such 
as  these,  being  the  single  aim  to  ascertain  the  truth. 

'  It  is  important,  however,  to  observe  that  the  present  volume 
exhibits  only  the  results  of  their  critical  investigations.  It  takes 
no  notice  of  the  text  of  any  previous  edition,  so  that  there  is 
nothing  to  show  the  extent  of  its  divergence  from  the  so-called 
"  received  text,"  or  of  its  agreement  with  the  great  critical 
editions  of  Tischendorf  and  Tregelles,  with  which,  notwith- 
standing many  differences,  it  does  agree  in  the  main.  There  is 
no  discussion  of  any  reading,  no  statement  of  the  authorities 
(manuscripts,  &c.),  which,  in  any  questionable  case,  support 
the  text.     Alternative    readings,  indeed,  are  given,  where  the 


NOTE.  163 

editors  regard  the  true  reading  as  more  or  less  uncertain  ;  also 
certain  noteworthy  rejected  readings  appear  in  the  text  in 
double  brackets,  or  in  the  margin  with  certain  marks  ;  and  at 
the  end  of  the  volume  there  is  a  list  of  still  other  rejected  read- 
ings "which  have  been  thought  worthy  of  notice  in  the 
appendix  [to  the  second  volume]  on  account  of  some  special 
interest  attaching  to  them."  This  list  also  includes  a  few 
passages  in  which  the  editors  (or  one  of  them)  suspect  "  some 
primitive  error,"  and  propose  conjectural  emendations.  But  it 
is  a  mere  list.  There  is  also  a  very  condensed  sketch  (pp.  54 1-- 
562)  of  the  conclusions  of  the  editors  in  regard  to  the  true 
principles  of  criticism,  the  history  of  the  text,  the  grouping  of 
our  chief  documentary  authorities  in  accordance  with  their 
peculiar  characteristics,  and  the  determination  of  the  relative 
value  of  the  several  documents  and  groups  of  documents,  in 
estimating  which  "  the  history  and  genealogy  of  textual  trans- 
mission have  been  taken  as  the  necessary  foundation." 

'  It  is  the  "  critical  introduction  "  in  vol.  ii.  which  will  give 
the  edition  of  Westcott  and  Hort  its  distinctive  value,  and 
which,  whether  all  their  conclusions  prove  firmly  established  or 
not,  will  be  most  heartily  w^elcomed  by  scholars,  and  cannot 
fail  to  contribute  greatly  to  the  advancement  of  New  Testament 
criticism.  They  have  undertaken  a  very  difficult  and  delicate 
task  ;  but  their  method  is  the  true  one.  Some  pioneering  had 
been  done  by  Griesbach  and  others  ;  but  no  such  comprehen- 
sive and  scientific  investigation  of  the  character  and  relative 
value  of  our  external  authorities  for  settling  the  text  has  been 
hitherto  attempted.  It  is  on  this  introduction  that  the  whole 
structure  of  the  editors  rests  ;  and  any  criticism  of  particular 
readings  which  they  have  adopted  should  in  fairness  be 
reserved  till  the  facts  and  reasonings  on  which  their  system 
of  criticism  is  founded  have  been  carefully  studied  and 
weighed. 

'  To  describe  the  four  types  of  text,  "  the  Western,"  "  the 
Alexandrian,"  "  the  Neutral,"  and  "  the  Syrian "  (earlier  and 
later),  which  they  find  represented  m  our  critical  documents, 
would  require  more  space  than  can  here  be  allowed.  It  may 
be  enough  to  say  that  the  text  which  they  designate  as 
"  neutral  "  and  regard  as  in  general  approximating  most  closely 


V 


1 64  NOTE. 

to  the  original  autographs,  is  represented  in  its  greatest  purity 
by  the  Vatican  manuscript  (B),  to  which  they  assign  superlative 
value  ;  the  Sinaitic  (Aleph)  being,  in  their  judgment,  next  in 
importance,  but  far  less  pure.  But,  "  with  certain  limited  classes 
of  exceptions,  the  readings  of  Aleph  and  B  combined  may 
safely  be  accepted  as  genuine  in  the  absence  of  specially  strong 
internal  evidence  to  the  contrary,  and  can  never  be  safely 
rejected  altogether"  (p.  557).  Nay,  every  combination  of  B 
with  one  other  primary  manuscript,  as  in  the  gospels  L,  C,  or 
T,  "  is  found  to  have  a  large  proportion  of  readings,  which  on 
the  closest  scrutiny  have  the  ring  of  genuineness,  and  hardly 
any  that  look  suspicious  after  full  consideration."  "  Even  when 
B  stands  alone,  its  readings  must  never  be  lightly  rejected" 
{ibid.).  This  estimate  differs  somewhat  from  that  of  Professor 
T.  R  Birks  of  Cambridge,  who  conceives  himself  to  have  proved, 
by  mathematical  calculations,  "  that  on  the  hypothesis  most 
favourable  to  the  early  manuscripts,  and  specially  to  the 
Vatican,  its  weight  is  exactly  that  of  two  manuscripts  of  the 
fifteenth  century,  while  the  Sinaitic  weighs  only  one-third  more 
than  an  average  manuscript  of  the  eleventh  century."  {Essay 
oil  the  Right  Esti77iatioii  of  Manuscript  Evideiice  in  the  Text 
of  the  New  Testament.     London,  1878,  p.  66.) 

'  The  present  volume  is  issued  in  such  a  form  that  it  may 
be  used  independently  of  the  second  :  and  it  is  apparently  sup- 
posed that  there  will  be  some  or  many  theological  students 
whose  want  of  a  convenient  manual  edition  will  be  met  by  this 
volume  alone.  It  certainly  is  one  which  every  theological 
student  may  well  desire  to  possess,  and  should  possess  if 
possible  ;  but  the  question  may  arise  how  far  it  will  serve  as  his 
only  edition.  If  he  is  ready  to  accept  the  conclusions  of  the 
editors  without  further  inquiry  or  examination  of  evidence,  and 
without  comparison  with  those  of  other  critics,  and  if  he  does 
not  care  to  have  a  text  furnished  with  references  to  parallel  or 
illustrative  passages,  or  to  the  quotations  from  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, this  volume  may  be  perfectly  satisfactory.  It  is  beauti- 
fully printed,  though  the  type  is  not  large  ;  the  lines  are  well 
leaded  ;  its  form  is  convenient  ;  and  it  may  be  read  with  great 
delight.  Indeed,  there  is  no  other  existing  edition  of  the  Greek 
Testament  in  which   so  much  is  done  to  aid  the  mind  of  the 


NOTE.  165 

reader  by  the  form  in  which  the  matter  is  presented  to  the  eye. 
The  great  natural  divisions  of  the  larger  books  are  marked  by 
a  wide  space,  and  by  the  printing  of  the  initial  words  in  capitals  ; 
the  minor  sub-divisions,  but  such  as  comprise  many  paragraphs, 
are  separated  by  a  smaller  space  ;  the  paragraphs,  when  they 
include  a  series  of  connected  topics,  as,  for  example,  Matt. 
V.  17-48,  are  broken  up  by  short  but  well-marked  spaces  into 
sub-paragraphs,  as  in  Herbert  Spencer's  writings, — a  most 
excellent  device,  worthy  of  general  introduction.  "  Uncial 
type  "  is  employed  for  quotations  from  the  Old  Testament,  and 
also  to  mark  phrases  borrowed  from  it ;  rhythmical  passages, 
like  Luke  i.  46-55,  68-79,  3-s  well  as  poetical  quotations  from 
the  Old  Testament,  are  printed  in  a  metrical  form.  The 
chapters  and  verses  are  numbered  only  in  the  margin.  This 
sometimes  leaves  uncertainty  as  to  the  beginning  of  a  verse,  in 
which  case  the  doubt  should  have  been  removed  by  a  little 
mark  of  separation.  For  one  who  wishes  to  give  himself  to  the 
continuous  reading  of  the  Greek  text  with  the  least  possible 
distraction,  this  edition  has  no  rival.' 

No  intelligent  scholar,  even  though  he  may  have  other 
editions  which  will  supply  some  of  the  deficiencies  that  have 
been  mentioned,  will  be  fully  contented  with  the  first  volume 
alone.  The  second  volume  is  really  the  basis  of  the  first,  and 
its  necessary  explanation  ;  it  is  that  by  which  the  value  of  the 
editors'  work  must  be  measured. 


LONDON   :      PRINTED      BY 

SPOTTISWOODE      A  I\  D     CO.,      NEW-STREET      SQUARE 

AND      PARLIAMENT      STREET 


S.    &   .£1. 


STANDARD    WORKS 

PUBLISHED  BY 

RICHARD     BENTLEY     &     SON. 


The     HISTORY    of    ANTIQUITY.      From    the    German    of    Max 

DuxcKKR.     By  EvFJ-YX  Abbott,  M.A.,  LL.D.,  of  Balliol  College,  Oxford.    The  first 
5  vols,  are  now  published  iu  deiny  8vo.  21^.  each. 

The    HISTORY    of    ROME.       From    the    German    of     Theodor 

MoMMSEx,  by  the  Rev.  W.  P.  DiCKSOx.    The  Library  Edicion,  4  vols,  demy  8vo.  lbs.; 
or  the  Popular  Editiou,  4  vols,  crown  Svo.  Aiis.  Qd. 

The  HISTORY  of  GREECE.    From  the  German  of  Ernst  Curtius. 

Bv  A.  W.  Ward,  M.A.     5  vols,  demy  Svo.  90,<;. 

The  RISE  and  PROGRESS  of  the  ENGLISH  CONSTITUTION.    By 

Sir  Edward  Creasy,  late  Chief  Justice  of  Cevlon.    Twelfth  Edition.   Crown  Svo.  Is.  Qd. 

The    LIVES  of  the   QUEENS   of   ENGLAND   of  the  HOUSE  of 

HANOVER.     By  JoH\  Lohax,  F.8.A.,  Anthor  of '  London  in  the  Jacobite  Times'  &c. 
Fourth  and  Enlarged  Edition.     2  vols,  demy  Svo.  25.?. 

The  NAVAL   HISTORY  of  GREAT   BRITAIN  (1793-1827).     By 

WiT.i.iA.M  Jam£S.      With  a  Continuation  by  Captain  Chamier.      6  vols,  crown  Svo. 
with  Portrait^,  36^. 

The    HISTORY   of   the   AMERICAN    CIVIL   WAR.      By   Colonel 

Fletcher.     3  vols,  demy  Svo.  64s. 

The     FIFTEEN     DECISIVE    BATTLES    of    the    WORLD,    from 

Marathon  to  Waterloo.    By  Sir  Edwaiu)  Creasy,  late  Chief  Justice  of  Ceylon.   Library 
Edition.     Demy  Svo.  10s.  *".(/. ;  or  the  Popular  Edition,  the  Twenty-seventh,  or.  Svo.  6s. 

The  HISTORY  of  the  OTTOMAN  TURKS,  from  the  Beginning  of 

their  Empire  to  tlie  Close  of  187S.     By  Sir  Edward  Creasy,  late  Chief  Justice  of 
Ceylon.    A  New  and  Revised  Edition,  being  the  Fifth.    Crown  Svo.  6s. 

CURIOSITIES   of   NATURAL    HISTORY.     By  Frank   Buckland. 

The   Popular  Edition.      With   Illustrations,  in  4  vols,  small  crown  Svo.  14s.     Each 
Volume  can  be  had  separately,  price  3s.  M. 

rhe  HEAVENS:  an  Illustrated  Handbook  of  Popular  Astronomy. 

By  Ameder  Cctillemix.    Edited  by  J.  Norman  Lockyer,  F.R.A.S.    Revised  Edition. 
Demy  Svo.  with  over  200  Illu.^tratious,  12s. 

ADAM   and    the   ADAMITE;   or,  the  Harmony  of  Scripture  and 

Ethnology.     By  Dominick  McCauslaxd,  Q.C.     Crown  Svo.  with  Map,  6s. 

'.ERMONS    in    STONES;    or,    Scripture    confirmed    by   Geology. 

By  Do.MixiCK  Mc'^AUSLAND,  Q.C.    New  Edition,  with  Memoir  of  the  Author.    Crown 
Svo.  with  19  Illustrations,  6s. 

The  BUILDERS  of  BABEL ;  or,  the  Confusion  of  Languages.     By 

DoMixicK  McCausland,  Q  C.    Ciown  Svo.  6s. 

ESSAYS,  Classical  and  Theological.     By  the  late  Connop  Thirl- 

WALL,  D.D.,  Bishop  of  St.  David's.     Edited  by  the  Rev.  Canon  Perowne.     Demy 
Svo.  20s. 

The   CHURCH    and    its   ORDINANCES.     Sermons   by  the  late 

Walter  Farquhar  Hook,  D.D.,  Dean  of  Chicliester.    Edited  by  the  Rev.  Walter 
Hook,  Rector  or  Porluck.     2  vols,  demy  Svor  10s.  6d. 

The  LIVES  of  the  ARCHBISHOPS  of  CANTERBURY,  from  St. 

Augustine  to  Juxon;    By  the  late  Walter  Farqchar  Hook,  D.D.,  Dean  of  Chichester. 
11  vols,  demy  Svo.  £8.  os. 

The   LIFE  and    LETTERS  of  WALTER  FARQUHAR   HOOK,  late 

Dean  of  Chichester.    Edited  by  the  Rev.  W.  R.  W.  Stephen.s,  Prei'endary  of  Chichester, 
&c.    The  Popular  Edition,  in  1  vol.  crown  Svo.  with  Index  and  Portrait,  6s. 


London  :  RICHARD  BENTLEY  &  SON,  8  New  Burlington  Street, 

^ubU&yeis  \x\  (L^riJimuij  to  ^cr  ^i-'jc^ti)  llj£  ^u«eu. 


STANDARD    WORKS 

PUBLISHED  BY 

RICHARD     BENTLEY     &     SON. 


The  AUTOBIOGRAPHY  of  PRINCE  METTERNICH.     1773-1830. 

Edited  bj'  his  Son,  Prince  Richard  Metternich.  5  vols,  demy  8to.  with  Portrait  and 
Facsimiles,  905. 

The  LIFE  of  LORD  PALMERSTON.     With   Selections  from  his 

Diaries  and  Correspondence.  By  the  Hon.  Evelyx  Ashley,  M.P.  The  New  Kditiou, 
2  vols,  crown  8vo.  with  Frontispiece  to  each  volume,  12.s. 

LORD    BEACONSFIELD:   his  Life,  Character,  and  Works.     From 

the  German  of  Georg  Br-VNDEs.    Bv  Jank  Stl'RGE.    Demv  8vo.  Cs. 

CORRESPONDENCE     OF    TALLEYRAND     AND     LOUIS     XVIII. 

DURING  THE  CONGRESS  OF  VIENNA.     In  2  vol^.  demy  8vo.  24^. 

MEMOIR  of  EARL  SPENCER  (Lord  Aithorp).     By  Sir  Denis  le 

Marchan'T,  Bart.     Demv  8vo.  Ids. 

HISTORICAL    CHARACTERS:    Talleyrand,   Mackintosh,    Cobbet, 

Canning,  Peel.    By  Lord  Dallixg  and  Bclwkr.    Fifth  and  Enlarged  Edition.     Crown 

A   MEMOIR  of  CHARLES  the  TWELFTH  of  SWEDEN.     By  his 

Majesty  Oscar  II.  Translated,  by  s]iecial  permission,  by  George  ApGeoijge,  Her 
Britannic  Majestv's  Consul  at  Stockholm.     Royal  8vo.  with  Two  Illustrations,  125. 

The  FRENCH  HUMORISTS  from  the  TWELFTH  to  the  Nine- 
teenth CENTURY.  By  Walter  Be.^axt.  M.A.,  Christ's  Coll.,  Cambridge.  Author 
of  'Stuiips  in  Earlv  French  Poetrv."  &c.     Demv  8vo.  I5.s. 

The  LIVES  of  WITS  and   HUMORISTS.     By  John  Times,  F.S.A. 

2  vols,  crown  8vo.  with  Portrait.  12,?.  The  LIVES  of  the  LATER  WITS  and 
HUMORISTS.     In  2  vols,  crown  8vo.  Us. 

The   LIFE  of   OLIVER    CROMWELL.     From  the  French  of   M. 

GuizoT.    Bv  Andrew  Scoble.     Crown  8vo.  with  Four  Portraits,  (is. 

The    LIFE   of    MARY    QUEEN  of    SCOTS.     From  the  French  of 

M.  MiGXET.     By  AXDREW  Scoble.     Crown  8vo.  with  Two  Portraits,  6.?. 

The   INGOLDSBY   LEGENDS;  or.  Mirth  and  Marvels.     By  Rev. 

Richard  Haeiris  Barham.  The  Annotated  Edition,  2  vols,  demy  8vo.  Illustrated  by 
Cruikshank  and  Leech,  245.  The  Illustrated  Edition,  printed  on  toned  paper,  crown 
4to.  bevelled  boards,  gilt  edges  2l5. ;  or,  in  white  binding,  22^.  6d.  The  Carmine 
Edition,  with  border  line  round  each  page,  with  Seventeen  Illustrations,  bevelled 
hoards,  gilt  edges,  10s.  6d.  The  BuilinKton  Edition,  3  vols,  frp  8vo  lUs.  6d.  The 
Edmburgh  Edition,  crown  8vo.  with  Thirty-two  Engravings  by  Crnikshank.  Leech, 
Tenniel,  and  Du  Maurier,  ;'loth,  65.  The  (New)  Popular  Edition,  crown  8vo.  cloth,  3s. Qd. 
The  Victoria  (Pocket)  Eiition,  in  fcp.  8vo.  cloth,  25. 

The  BENTLEY   BALLADS.     Selected  from  'Bentley's  Miscellany.' 

Crown  Svo.  Gs. 

The    NOVELS  of   MISS   FERRIER.     Library  Edition,  in  G  vols. 

2I5.  ;  or  each  storv.  separately.  Is. 

The    NOVELS   of    MISS   AUSTEN.     The  only  Complete  Edition. 

6  vols,  crown  Svo.  with  a  Frontispiece  to  each  volume,  065. ;  or  each  volume  separately,  65. 

The    WORKS    of    THOMAS    LOVE    PEACOCK.     The   Collected 

Edition,  including  his  Novels,  Fugitive  Pieces,  Poems,  &c.  EJiteJ  by  Sir  Hkxry  Cole, 
K.C.B.,  and  with  Preface  by  Lor.i  Hougiiiox.    3  vols,  crown  tivu.  with  Portrait, 31-$. 6'/. 

The  NOVELS  of  MISS  BROUGHTON.     7  vols,  crown  8vo.  42.s. ; 

or  each  volume  separately,  Gs, 

The    NOVELS   of    MRS.   HENRY  WOOD.     27   vols,   crown   8vo. 

£-^.  2.<.  ;  or  each  volume  separately,  6s. 


London  :  RICHARD  BENTLEY  &  SON,  8  New  Bm^lington  Street, 
^uhusiji^rs  in  lyrDmaru  to   i^cr  4tiajestij  tl)c  (L^uccn.